1% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
2% 
3% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
4\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
5%
6\def\texinfoversion{2013-02-01.11}
7%
8% Copyright 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995,
9% 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006,
10% 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
11%
12% This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or
13% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
14% published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the
15% License, or (at your option) any later version.
16%
17% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
18% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
19% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
20% General Public License for more details.
21%
22% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
23% along with this program.  If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
24%
25% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing
26% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without
27% restriction. This Exception is an additional permission under section 7
28% of the GNU General Public License, version 3 ("GPLv3").
29%
30% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
31% reports; you can get the latest version from:
32%   http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/ (the Texinfo release area), or
33%   http://ftpmirror.gnu.org/texinfo/ (same, via a mirror), or
34%   http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page)
35% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out
36% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
37%
38% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org.  Please include including a
39% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
40% problem.  Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
41%
42% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
43% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution.  For a simple
44% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
45%   tex foo.texi
46%   texindex foo.??
47%   tex foo.texi
48%   tex foo.texi
49%   dvips foo.dvi -o  # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.
50% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.
51% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
52% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
53%
54% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some
55% extent.  You can get the existing language-specific files from the
56% full Texinfo distribution.
57%
58% The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
59
60
61\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
62
63% If in a .fmt file, print the version number
64% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
65% they might have appeared in the input file name.
66\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
67  \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
68
69\chardef\other=12
70
71% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo.
72% For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
73\let\+ = \relax
74
75% Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine.
76\let\ptexb=\b
77\let\ptexbullet=\bullet
78\let\ptexc=\c
79\let\ptexcomma=\,
80\let\ptexdot=\.
81\let\ptexdots=\dots
82\let\ptexend=\end
83\let\ptexequiv=\equiv
84\let\ptexexclam=\!
85\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
86\let\ptexgtr=>
87\let\ptexhat=^
88\let\ptexi=\i
89\let\ptexindent=\indent
90\let\ptexinsert=\insert
91\let\ptexlbrace=\{
92\let\ptexless=<
93\let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite
94\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent
95\let\ptexplus=+
96\let\ptexraggedright=\raggedright
97\let\ptexrbrace=\}
98\let\ptexslash=\/
99\let\ptexstar=\*
100\let\ptext=\t
101\let\ptextop=\top
102{\catcode`\'=\active \global\let\ptexquoteright'}% active in plain's math mode
103
104% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
105% starts a new line in the output.
106\newlinechar = `^^J
107
108% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
109% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
110%
111\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
112  \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.
113\else
114  \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space}
115\fi
116
117% Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
118\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined  \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
119\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined   \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
120\ifx\putworderror\undefined     \gdef\putworderror{error}\fi
121\ifx\putwordfile\undefined      \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
122\ifx\putwordin\undefined        \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
123\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined       \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
124\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined   \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
125\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined      \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
126\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
127\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined  \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
128\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined   \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
129\ifx\putwordof\undefined        \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
130\ifx\putwordon\undefined        \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
131\ifx\putwordpage\undefined      \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
132\ifx\putwordsection\undefined   \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
133\ifx\putwordSection\undefined   \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
134\ifx\putwordsee\undefined       \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
135\ifx\putwordSee\undefined       \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
136\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined  \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
137\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined       \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
138%
139\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
140\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
141\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
142\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
143\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
144\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
145\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
146\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
147\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
148\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
149\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
150\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
151%
152\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
153\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined   \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
154\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
155\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
156\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined   \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
157
158% Since the category of space is not known, we have to be careful.
159\chardef\spacecat = 10
160\def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =\spacecat}
161
162% sometimes characters are active, so we need control sequences.
163\chardef\ampChar   = `\&
164\chardef\colonChar = `\:
165\chardef\commaChar = `\,
166\chardef\dashChar  = `\-
167\chardef\dotChar   = `\.
168\chardef\exclamChar= `\!
169\chardef\hashChar  = `\#
170\chardef\lquoteChar= `\`
171\chardef\questChar = `\?
172\chardef\rquoteChar= `\'
173\chardef\semiChar  = `\;
174\chardef\slashChar = `\/
175\chardef\underChar = `\_
176
177% Ignore a token.
178%
179\def\gobble#1{}
180
181% The following is used inside several \edef's.
182\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
183
184% Hyphenation fixes.
185\hyphenation{
186  Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script
187  ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps
188  data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script
189  man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm
190  par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces
191  spell-ing spell-ings
192  stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space
193  wide-spread wrap-around
194}
195
196% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
197\newdimen\bindingoffset
198\newdimen\normaloffset
199\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
200
201% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
202% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
203% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
204%
205\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt }
206
207% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
208% and nothing on the terminal.  We don't just call \tracingall here,
209% since that produces some useless output on the terminal.  We also make
210% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log
211% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX.
212%
213\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
214\def\loggingall{%
215  \tracingstats2
216  \tracingpages1
217  \tracinglostchars2  % 2 gives us more in etex
218  \tracingparagraphs1
219  \tracingoutput1
220  \tracingmacros2
221  \tracingrestores1
222  \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen
223  \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined\else % etex gives us more logging
224    \tracingscantokens1
225    \tracingifs1
226    \tracinggroups1
227    \tracingnesting2
228    \tracingassigns1
229  \fi
230  \tracingcommands3  % 3 gives us more in etex
231  \errorcontextlines16
232}%
233
234% @errormsg{MSG}.  Do the index-like expansions on MSG, but if things
235% aren't perfect, it's not the end of the world, being an error message,
236% after all.
237% 
238\def\errormsg{\begingroup \indexnofonts \doerrormsg}
239\def\doerrormsg#1{\errmessage{#1}}
240
241% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions.  If the last thing
242% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
243%
244\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
245  \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}
246\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
247  \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi}
248\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
249  \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}
250
251% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
252%
253\newif\ifcropmarks
254\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
255%
256% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
257% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
258%
259\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
260\newdimen\cornerlong  \cornerlong=1pc
261\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
262\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
263
264% Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor.
265% We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark.
266% This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark.
267%
268% A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct.
269% \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase.
270%
271% Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter
272% (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top
273% of a page, or that at the bottom of a page.  The solution is
274% described on page 260 of The TeXbook.  It involves outputting two
275% marks for the sectioning macros, one before the section break, and
276% one after.  I won't pretend I can describe this better than DEK...
277\def\domark{%
278  \toks0=\expandafter{\lastchapterdefs}%
279  \toks2=\expandafter{\lastsectiondefs}%
280  \toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}%
281  \toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}%
282  \toks8=\expandafter{\lastcolordefs}%
283  \mark{%
284                   \the\toks0 \the\toks2
285      \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6
286    \noexpand\else \the\toks8
287  }%
288}
289% \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title
290% page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us
291% the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g.,
292% @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very
293% first @chapter.
294\def\gettopheadingmarks{%
295  \ifcase0\topmark\fi
296  \ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi
297}
298\def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi}
299\def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\topmark\fi}
300
301% Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors.
302\def\lastchapterdefs{}
303\def\lastsectiondefs{}
304\def\prevchapterdefs{}
305\def\prevsectiondefs{}
306\def\lastcolordefs{}
307
308% Main output routine.
309\chardef\PAGE = 255
310\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
311
312\newbox\headlinebox
313\newbox\footlinebox
314
315% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument.  Note that \pagecontents
316% does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
317\def\onepageout#1{%
318  \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
319  %
320  \ifodd\pageno  \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
321  \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
322  %
323  % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
324  % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
325  \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi
326  \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
327  \ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi
328  \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
329  %
330  {%
331    % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
332    % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
333    % before the \shipout runs.
334    %
335    \indexdummies         % don't expand commands in the output.
336    \normalturnoffactive  % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
337               % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
338               % We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this:
339               % \entry{{\tt \indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}}
340               % "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in;
341               % it needs to be
342               % {\code {{\tt \backslashcurfont }acronym}
343    \shipout\vbox{%
344      % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
345      \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi
346      %
347      \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
348        \hsize = \outerhsize
349        \vskip-\topandbottommargin
350        \vtop to0pt{%
351          \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
352          \nointerlineskip
353          \line{%
354            \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
355            \hfill
356            \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
357          }%
358          \vss}%
359        \vskip\topandbottommargin
360        \line\bgroup
361          \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
362          \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
363          \vbox\bgroup
364      \fi
365      %
366      \unvbox\headlinebox
367      \pagebody{#1}%
368      \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
369        % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
370        % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.)
371        % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
372        \vskip 24pt
373        \unvbox\footlinebox
374      \fi
375      %
376      \ifcropmarks
377          \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
378        \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
379        \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
380        \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
381        \vbox to0pt{\vss
382          \line{%
383            \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
384            \hfill
385            \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
386          }%
387          \nointerlineskip
388          \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
389        }%
390      \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
391      \fi
392    }% end of \shipout\vbox
393  }% end of group with \indexdummies
394  \advancepageno
395  \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
396}
397
398\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
399
400\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
401{\catcode`\@ =11
402\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
403% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
404\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
405  \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
406\dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax
407\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
408\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
409}
410
411% Here are the rules for the cropmarks.  Note that they are
412% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
413% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
414%
415\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
416\def\nstop{\vbox
417  {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
418\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
419\def\nsbot{\vbox
420  {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
421
422% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1.  The argument is the rest of
423% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment).  #1 should be a
424% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
425%
426\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}}
427\def\parseargusing#1#2{%
428  \def\argtorun{#2}%
429  \begingroup
430    \obeylines
431    \spaceisspace
432    #1%
433    \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below.
434}
435
436{\obeylines %
437  \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
438    \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
439    \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm%
440  }%
441}
442
443% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment.
444\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm}
445\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm}
446
447% Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space.
448%
449% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g.,
450%    @end itemize  @c foo
451% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed
452% by \finishparsearg.
453%
454\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M}
455\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M}
456\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{%
457  \def\temp{#3}%
458  \ifx\temp\empty
459    % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp:
460    \let\temp\finishparsearg
461  \else
462    \let\temp\argcheckspaces
463  \fi
464  % Put the space token in:
465  \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm
466}
467
468% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so
469% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation.
470% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now,
471% just before passing the control to \argtorun.
472% (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is
473% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger
474% that a pair of braces would be stripped.
475%
476% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token.
477%
478\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}}
479
480% \parseargdef\foo{...}
481%	is roughly equivalent to
482% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo}
483% \def\Xfoo#1{...}
484%
485% Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my
486% favourite TeX trick.  --kasal, 16nov03
487
488\def\parseargdef#1{%
489  \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1%
490}
491\def\doparseargdef#1#2{%
492  \def#2{\parsearg#1}%
493  \def#1##1%
494}
495
496% Several utility definitions with active space:
497{
498  \obeyspaces
499  \gdef\obeyedspace{ }
500
501  % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
502  % space in the output.  Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
503  % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
504  % should produce a line of output anyway.
505  %
506  \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}
507
508  % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
509  % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
510  % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
511  \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space}
512}
513
514
515\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
516
517% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex.  It's used like this:
518%
519%   \envdef\foo{...}
520%   \def\Efoo{...}
521%
522% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the
523% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo.  \envdef also
524% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks
525% whether the environment name matches.  The \checkenv macro can also be
526% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected.
527%
528% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they
529% are not treated as environments; they don't open a group.  (The
530% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this
531% special case.)
532
533
534% At run-time, environments start with this:
535\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}}
536% initialize
537\let\thisenv\empty
538
539% ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'':
540\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
541\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
542
543% Check whether we're in the right environment:
544\def\checkenv#1{%
545  \def\temp{#1}%
546  \ifx\thisenv\temp
547  \else
548    \badenverr
549  \fi
550}
551
552% Environment mismatch, #1 expected:
553\def\badenverr{%
554  \errhelp = \EMsimple
555  \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp,
556    not \inenvironment\thisenv}%
557}
558\def\inenvironment#1{%
559  \ifx#1\empty
560    outside of any environment%
561  \else
562    in environment \expandafter\string#1%
563  \fi
564}
565
566% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
567% But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv
568%
569\parseargdef\end{%
570  \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname
571  \else
572    % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal.
573    \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname
574    \csname E#1\endcsname
575    \endgroup
576  \fi
577}
578
579\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
580
581
582% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
583% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
584% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
585% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
586% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
587{\catcode`@ = 11
588 % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
589 % if the definition is written into an index file.
590 \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
591 \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
592}
593
594% @: forces normal size whitespace following.
595\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
596
597% @* forces a line break.
598\def\*{\unskip\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
599
600% @/ allows a line break.
601\let\/=\allowbreak
602
603% @. is an end-of-sentence period.
604\def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
605
606% @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
607\def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
608
609% @? is an end-of-sentence query.
610\def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
611
612% @frenchspacing on|off  says whether to put extra space after punctuation.
613%
614\def\onword{on}
615\def\offword{off}
616%
617\parseargdef\frenchspacing{%
618  \def\temp{#1}%
619  \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing
620  \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing
621  \else
622    \errhelp = \EMsimple
623    \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on|off}%
624  \fi\fi
625}
626
627% @w prevents a word break.  Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
628% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
629% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
630\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
631
632% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
633% it in a TeX vbox.  We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
634% to keep its height that of a normal line.  According to the rules for
635% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
636% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0).  If that height is large,
637% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
638% the text is small, which looks bad.
639%
640% Another complication is that the group might be very large.  This can
641% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it
642% does not have much material.  In this case, it's better to add an
643% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom.  The
644% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit
645% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex).
646%
647\newbox\groupbox
648\def\vfilllimit{0.7}
649%
650\envdef\group{%
651  \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else
652    \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
653    \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
654  \fi
655  \startsavinginserts
656  %
657  \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup
658    % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
659    % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
660    % end-of-line in the output.  We don't want the end-of-line after
661    % the `@group' to put extra space in the output.  Since @group
662    % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
663    % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
664    \comment
665}
666%
667% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts
668% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done)
669% \lineskip glue after it.  Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
670% above.  But it's pretty close.
671\def\Egroup{%
672    % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group
673    % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth.
674    \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar.
675    \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth
676  \egroup           % End the \vtop.
677  % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
678  \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox  \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
679  % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
680  \dimen2 = \pageheight   \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal
681  % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
682  % group, force a page break.
683  \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2
684    \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight
685      \page
686    \fi
687  \fi
688  \box\groupbox
689  \prevdepth = \dimen1
690  \checkinserts
691}
692%
693% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
694% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
695%
696\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
697group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
698where each line of input produces a line of output.}
699
700% @need space-in-mils
701% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
702
703\newdimen\mil  \mil=0.001in
704
705\parseargdef\need{%
706  % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
707  % paragraph.
708  \par
709  %
710  % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
711  \dimen0 = #1\mil
712  \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
713  \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
714  \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
715    %
716    % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
717    % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
718    % And a page break here is fine.
719    \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
720    %
721    % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
722    % main vertical list is 10000 or more.  But in order to see if the
723    % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
724    % page breaks.  On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
725    % page after the empty box.  So we use a penalty of 9999.
726    %
727    % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
728    % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
729    % sight.  (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
730    % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
731    % good page breaking, for example.)  However, I could not construct an
732    % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
733    % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
734    \penalty9999
735    %
736    % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
737    \kern -#1\mil
738    %
739    % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
740    \nobreak
741  \fi
742}
743
744% @br   forces paragraph break (and is undocumented).
745
746\let\br = \par
747
748% @page forces the start of a new page.
749%
750\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
751
752% @exdent text....
753% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
754
755% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
756% That's how much \exdent should take out.
757\newskip\exdentamount
758
759% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
760\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}
761
762% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
763\parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
764  \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
765
766% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
767% paragraph.  For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
768% class.  WHICH is `l' or `r'.  Not documented, written for gawk manual.
769%
770\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
771\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
772%
773\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{%
774  \nobreak
775  \kern-\strutdepth
776  \vtop to \strutdepth{%
777    \baselineskip=\strutdepth
778    \vss
779    % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to
780    % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.
781    \ifx#1l%
782      \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}%
783    \else
784      \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}%
785    \fi
786    \null
787  }%
788}}
789\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l}
790\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r}
791%
792% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
793% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
794% else use TEXT for both).
795%
796\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish}
797\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
798  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
799  \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
800    \def\lefttext{#1}%  have both texts
801    \def\righttext{#2}%
802  \else
803    \def\lefttext{#1}%  have only one text
804    \def\righttext{#1}%
805  \fi
806  %
807  \ifodd\pageno
808    \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin
809  \else
810    \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}%
811  \fi
812  \temp
813}
814
815% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line.  It should
816% surround any changed text.  This approach does *not* work if the
817% change spans more than two lines of output.  To handle that, we would
818% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
819% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).  This command
820% is not documented, not supported, and doesn't work.
821%
822\def\|{%
823  % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
824  \leavevmode
825  %
826  % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
827  \vadjust{%
828    % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
829    % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
830    \vskip-\baselineskip
831    %
832    % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type.  So
833    % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
834    \llap{%
835      %
836      % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
837      \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
838      %
839      % This is the space between the bar and the text.
840      \hskip 12pt
841    }%
842  }%
843}
844
845% @include FILE -- \input text of FILE.
846%
847\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz}
848\def\includezzz#1{%
849  \pushthisfilestack
850  \def\thisfile{#1}%
851  {%
852    \makevalueexpandable  % we want to expand any @value in FILE.
853    \turnoffactive        % and allow special characters in the expansion
854    \indexnofonts         % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
855    \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @include of #1^^J}%
856    \edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }%
857    %
858    % This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes
859    % definitions, etc.
860    \expandafter
861  }\temp
862  \popthisfilestack
863}
864\def\filenamecatcodes{%
865  \catcode`\\=\other
866  \catcode`~=\other
867  \catcode`^=\other
868  \catcode`_=\other
869  \catcode`|=\other
870  \catcode`<=\other
871  \catcode`>=\other
872  \catcode`+=\other
873  \catcode`-=\other
874  \catcode`\`=\other
875  \catcode`\'=\other
876}
877
878\def\pushthisfilestack{%
879  \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm
880}
881\def\pushthisfilestackX{%
882  \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm
883}
884\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {%
885  \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}%
886}
887
888\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty}
889\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error:
890  the stack of filenames is empty.}}
891%
892\def\thisfile{}
893
894% @center line
895% outputs that line, centered.
896%
897\parseargdef\center{%
898  \ifhmode
899    \let\centersub\centerH
900  \else
901    \let\centersub\centerV
902  \fi
903  \centersub{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
904  \let\centersub\relax % don't let the definition persist, just in case
905}
906\def\centerH#1{{%
907  \hfil\break
908  \advance\hsize by -\leftskip
909  \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
910  \line{#1}%
911  \break
912}}
913%
914\newcount\centerpenalty
915\def\centerV#1{%
916  % The idea here is the same as in \startdefun, \cartouche, etc.: if
917  % @center is the first thing after a section heading, we need to wipe
918  % out the negative parskip inserted by \sectionheading, but still
919  % prevent a page break here.
920  \centerpenalty = \lastpenalty
921  \ifnum\centerpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \fi
922  \ifnum\centerpenalty>9999 \penalty\centerpenalty \fi
923  \line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}%
924}
925
926% @sp n   outputs n lines of vertical space
927%
928\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
929
930% @comment ...line which is ignored...
931% @c is the same as @comment
932% @ignore ... @end ignore  is another way to write a comment
933%
934\def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
935\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
936\commentxxx}
937{\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
938%
939\let\c=\comment
940
941% @paragraphindent NCHARS
942% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
943% NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'.
944% We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
945%
946\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
947\def\noneword{none}
948%
949\parseargdef\paragraphindent{%
950  \def\temp{#1}%
951  \ifx\temp\asisword
952  \else
953    \ifx\temp\noneword
954      \defaultparindent = 0pt
955    \else
956      \defaultparindent = #1em
957    \fi
958  \fi
959  \parindent = \defaultparindent
960}
961
962% @exampleindent NCHARS
963% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
964% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
965% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
966\parseargdef\exampleindent{%
967  \def\temp{#1}%
968  \ifx\temp\asisword
969  \else
970    \ifx\temp\noneword
971      \lispnarrowing = 0pt
972    \else
973      \lispnarrowing = #1em
974    \fi
975  \fi
976}
977
978% @firstparagraphindent WORD
979% If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph
980% after a section heading.  If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such
981% paragraphs.
982%
983% The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling
984% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do.
985% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD.
986% By default, we suppress indentation.
987%
988\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent}
989\def\insertword{insert}
990%
991\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{%
992  \def\temp{#1}%
993  \ifx\temp\noneword
994    \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent
995  \else\ifx\temp\insertword
996    \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax
997  \else
998    \errhelp = \EMsimple
999    \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}%
1000  \fi\fi
1001}
1002
1003% Here is how we actually suppress indentation.  Redefine \everypar to
1004% \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty.
1005%
1006% We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next
1007% paragraph.
1008%
1009\gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{%
1010  \gdef\indent{%
1011    \restorefirstparagraphindent
1012    \indent
1013  }%
1014  \gdef\noindent{%
1015    \restorefirstparagraphindent
1016    \noindent
1017  }%
1018  \global\everypar = {%
1019    \kern -\parindent
1020    \restorefirstparagraphindent
1021  }%
1022}
1023
1024\gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{%
1025  \global \let \indent = \ptexindent
1026  \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent
1027  \global \everypar = {}%
1028}
1029
1030
1031% @refill is a no-op.
1032\let\refill=\relax
1033
1034% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
1035% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
1036% This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
1037%
1038\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
1039\let\novalidate = \linksfalse
1040
1041% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
1042% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
1043% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
1044\def\setfilename{%
1045   \fixbackslash  % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
1046   \iflinks
1047     \tryauxfile
1048     % Open the new aux file.  TeX will close it automatically at exit.
1049     \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
1050   \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
1051   \openindices
1052   \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
1053   %
1054   % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
1055   % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
1056   \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
1057   \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi
1058   \closein 1
1059   %
1060   \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
1061}
1062
1063% Called from \setfilename.
1064%
1065\def\openindices{%
1066  \newindex{cp}%
1067  \newcodeindex{fn}%
1068  \newcodeindex{vr}%
1069  \newcodeindex{tp}%
1070  \newcodeindex{ky}%
1071  \newcodeindex{pg}%
1072}
1073
1074% @bye.
1075\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
1076
1077
1078\message{pdf,}
1079% adobe `portable' document format
1080\newcount\tempnum
1081\newcount\lnkcount
1082\newtoks\filename
1083\newcount\filenamelength
1084\newcount\pgn
1085\newtoks\toksA
1086\newtoks\toksB
1087\newtoks\toksC
1088\newtoks\toksD
1089\newbox\boxA
1090\newcount\countA
1091\newif\ifpdf
1092\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
1093
1094% when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1
1095% can be set).  So we test for \relax and 0 as well as being undefined.
1096\ifx\pdfoutput\thisisundefined
1097\else
1098  \ifx\pdfoutput\relax
1099  \else
1100    \ifcase\pdfoutput
1101    \else
1102      \pdftrue
1103    \fi
1104  \fi
1105\fi
1106
1107% PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets,
1108% for display in the outlines, and in other places.  Thus, we have to
1109% double any backslashes.  Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be
1110% interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e.  Not good.
1111% 
1112% See http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html and
1113% related messages.  The final outcome is that it is up to the TeX user
1114% to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so
1115% that's what we do.  pdftex 1.30.0 (ca.2005) introduced a primitive to
1116% do this reliably, so we use it.
1117
1118% #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements,
1119% which we \xdef.
1120\def\txiescapepdf#1{%
1121  \ifx\pdfescapestring\thisisundefined
1122    % No primitive available; should we give a warning or log?
1123    % Many times it won't matter.
1124  \else
1125    % The expandable \pdfescapestring primitive escapes parentheses,
1126    % backslashes, and other special chars.
1127    \xdef#1{\pdfescapestring{#1}}%
1128  \fi
1129}
1130
1131\newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images
1132with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found.  (.eps cannot
1133be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI
1134output) for that.)}
1135
1136\ifpdf
1137  %
1138  % Color manipulation macros based on pdfcolor.tex,
1139  % except using rgb instead of cmyk; the latter is said to render as a
1140  % very dark gray on-screen and a very dark halftone in print, instead
1141  % of actual black.
1142  \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12}
1143  \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0}
1144  %
1145  % k sets the color for filling (usual text, etc.);
1146  % K sets the color for stroking (thin rules, e.g., normal _'s).
1147  \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 rg  #1 RG}}
1148  %
1149  % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly,
1150  % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore.
1151  \def\setcolor#1{%
1152    \xdef\lastcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}%
1153    \domark
1154    \pdfsetcolor{#1}%
1155  }
1156  %
1157  \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack}
1158  \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}
1159  \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor}
1160  \def\lastcolordefs{}
1161  %
1162  \def\makefootline{%
1163    \baselineskip24pt
1164    \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}%
1165  }
1166  %
1167  \def\makeheadline{%
1168    \vbox to 0pt{%
1169      \vskip-22.5pt
1170      \line{%
1171        \vbox to8.5pt{}%
1172        % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks.
1173        \getcolormarks
1174        % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color.
1175        \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}%
1176      }%
1177      \vss
1178    }%
1179    \nointerlineskip
1180  }
1181  %
1182  %
1183  \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}
1184  %
1185  % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto).
1186  \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
1187    \def\pdfimagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
1188    \def\pdfimageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
1189    %
1190    % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .pdf, .png, .jpg (among
1191    % others).  Let's try in that order, PDF first since if
1192    % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a
1193    % bitmap.
1194    \let\pdfimgext=\empty
1195    \begingroup
1196      \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1
1197        \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1
1198          \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1
1199            \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1
1200              \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1
1201                \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1
1202                  \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp
1203                  \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}%
1204                \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}%
1205                \fi
1206              \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}%
1207              \fi
1208            \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}%
1209            \fi
1210          \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}%
1211          \fi
1212        \else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}%
1213        \fi
1214      \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}%
1215      \fi
1216      \closein 1
1217    \endgroup
1218    %
1219    % without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is
1220    % included twice.  (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
1221    \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
1222      \immediate\pdfimage
1223    \else
1224      \immediate\pdfximage
1225    \fi
1226      \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \pdfimagewidth \fi
1227      \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \pdfimageheight \fi
1228      \ifnum\pdftexversion<13
1229         #1.\pdfimgext
1230       \else
1231         {#1.\pdfimgext}%
1232       \fi
1233    \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
1234      \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
1235    \fi}
1236  %
1237  \def\pdfmkdest#1{{%
1238    % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters
1239    % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title.
1240    \indexnofonts
1241    \turnoffactive
1242    \makevalueexpandable
1243    \def\pdfdestname{#1}%
1244    \txiescapepdf\pdfdestname
1245    \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}%
1246  }}
1247  %
1248  % used to mark target names; must be expandable.
1249  \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}
1250  %
1251  % by default, use a color that is dark enough to print on paper as
1252  % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing.
1253  \def\urlcolor{\rgbDarkRed}
1254  \def\linkcolor{\rgbDarkRed}
1255  \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink}
1256  %
1257  % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
1258  % come from Petr Olsak
1259  \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
1260    \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
1261  \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
1262    \advance\tempnum by 1
1263    \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
1264  %
1265  % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the
1266  % outline by the pdf viewer.  #2 is the pdf expression for the number
1267  % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections).  #3 is the node text,
1268  % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node.
1269  % #4 is the page number
1270  %
1271  \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
1272    % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the
1273    % page number.  We could generate a destination for the section
1274    % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't
1275    % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured.
1276    \edef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
1277    \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty
1278      \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}%
1279    \else
1280      \txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinedest
1281    \fi
1282    %
1283    % Also escape PDF chars in the display string.
1284    \edef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
1285    \txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinetext
1286    %
1287    \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}%
1288  }
1289  %
1290  \def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
1291    \begingroup
1292      % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline.
1293      \def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines
1294      \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
1295	\def\thischapnum{##2}%
1296	\def\thissecnum{0}%
1297	\def\thissubsecnum{0}%
1298      }%
1299      \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1300	\advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}%
1301	\def\thissecnum{##2}%
1302	\def\thissubsecnum{0}%
1303      }%
1304      \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1305	\advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}%
1306	\def\thissubsecnum{##2}%
1307      }%
1308      \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1309	\advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}%
1310      }%
1311      \def\thischapnum{0}%
1312      \def\thissecnum{0}%
1313      \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
1314      %
1315      % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et
1316      % al. a second time, below.
1317      \def\appentry{\numchapentry}%
1318      \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}%
1319      \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
1320      \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
1321      \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}%
1322      \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}%
1323      \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
1324      \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
1325      \readdatafile{toc}%
1326      %
1327      % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines.
1328      % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of
1329      % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above.
1330      %
1331      % We use the node names as the destinations.
1332      \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
1333        \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
1334      \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1335        \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
1336      \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1337        \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
1338      \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero
1339        \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}%
1340      %
1341      % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of
1342      % document fonts.  Therefore we cannot use special characters,
1343      % since the encoding is unknown.  For example, the eogonek from
1344      % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character.  Info from
1345      % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100.
1346      %
1347      % TODO this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to
1348      % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding.  Too
1349      % much work for too little return.  Just use the ASCII equivalents
1350      % we use for the index sort strings.
1351      % 
1352      \indexnofonts
1353      \setupdatafile
1354      % We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike
1355      % Texinfo index files.  So set that up.
1356      \def\{{\lbracecharliteral}%
1357      \def\}{\rbracecharliteral}%
1358      \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash
1359      \input \tocreadfilename
1360    \endgroup
1361  }
1362  {\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2
1363   \catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other
1364   \gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]%
1365   \gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]%
1366  ]
1367  %
1368  \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
1369    \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
1370    \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
1371      \addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
1372      \advance\filenamelength by 1
1373    \fi
1374    \nextsp}
1375  \def\getfilename#1{%
1376    \filenamelength=0
1377    % If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get
1378    % snagged on things like "@value{foo}".
1379    \edef\temp{#1}%
1380    \expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax
1381  }
1382  \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
1383    \let \startlink \pdfannotlink
1384  \else
1385    \let \startlink \pdfstartlink
1386  \fi
1387  % make a live url in pdf output.
1388  \def\pdfurl#1{%
1389    \begingroup
1390      % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not
1391      % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context
1392      % of @url.  for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one
1393      % people have actually reported a problem with.
1394      %
1395      \normalturnoffactive
1396      \def\@{@}%
1397      \let\/=\empty
1398      \makevalueexpandable
1399      % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just
1400      % special-casing \var here?
1401      \def\var##1{##1}%
1402      %
1403      \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}%
1404      \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
1405        user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
1406    \endgroup}
1407  \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
1408  \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
1409  \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
1410  \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
1411  \def\maketoks{%
1412    \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax
1413    \ifx\first0\adn0
1414    \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
1415    \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
1416    \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
1417    \else
1418      \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
1419      \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
1420        \let\next=\maketoks
1421        \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
1422        \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
1423      \fi
1424    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
1425    \next}
1426  \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
1427    {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
1428  \def\pdflink#1{%
1429    \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
1430    \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink}
1431  \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
1432\else
1433  % non-pdf mode
1434  \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
1435  \let\pdfurl = \gobble
1436  \let\endlink = \relax
1437  \let\setcolor = \gobble
1438  \let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble
1439  \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
1440\fi  % \ifx\pdfoutput
1441
1442
1443\message{fonts,}
1444
1445% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle.
1446% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in
1447% italics, not bold italics.
1448%
1449\def\setfontstyle#1{%
1450  \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd.
1451  \csname ten#1\endcsname  % change the current font
1452}
1453
1454% Select #1 fonts with the current style.
1455%
1456\def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname}
1457
1458\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}}
1459\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}}
1460\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}}
1461\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf}
1462\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}}
1463
1464% Unfortunately, we have to override this for titles and the like, since
1465% in those cases "rm" is bold.  Sigh.
1466\def\rmisbold{\rm\def\curfontstyle{bf}}
1467
1468% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
1469% So we set up a \sf.
1470\newfam\sffam
1471\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}}
1472\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
1473
1474% We don't need math for this font style.
1475\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}}
1476
1477
1478% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
1479% correspondingly.  There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
1480% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
1481%
1482\def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
1483\def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
1484\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
1485%
1486% can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this.
1487\def\baselinefactor{1}
1488%
1489\newdimen\textleading
1490\def\setleading#1{%
1491  \dimen0 = #1\relax
1492  \normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0
1493  \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
1494  \normalbaselines
1495  \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
1496    \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
1497                    depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
1498  }%
1499}
1500
1501% PDF CMaps.  See also LaTeX's t1.cmap.
1502%
1503% do nothing with this by default.
1504\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble
1505\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble
1506\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble
1507
1508% if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps.
1509% (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run
1510% older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.)
1511\ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\thisisundefined \else
1512  \begingroup
1513    \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
1514    \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
1515%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
1516%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
1517%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0)
1518%%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0)
1519%%Version: 1.000
1520%%EndComments
1521/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
152212 dict begin
1523begincmap
1524/CIDSystemInfo
1525<< /Registry (TeX)
1526/Ordering (OT1)
1527/Supplement 0
1528>> def
1529/CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def
1530/CMapType 2 def
15311 begincodespacerange
1532<00> <7F>
1533endcodespacerange
15348 beginbfrange
1535<00> <01> <0393>
1536<09> <0A> <03A8>
1537<23> <26> <0023>
1538<28> <3B> <0028>
1539<3F> <5B> <003F>
1540<5D> <5E> <005D>
1541<61> <7A> <0061>
1542<7B> <7C> <2013>
1543endbfrange
154440 beginbfchar
1545<02> <0398>
1546<03> <039B>
1547<04> <039E>
1548<05> <03A0>
1549<06> <03A3>
1550<07> <03D2>
1551<08> <03A6>
1552<0B> <00660066>
1553<0C> <00660069>
1554<0D> <0066006C>
1555<0E> <006600660069>
1556<0F> <00660066006C>
1557<10> <0131>
1558<11> <0237>
1559<12> <0060>
1560<13> <00B4>
1561<14> <02C7>
1562<15> <02D8>
1563<16> <00AF>
1564<17> <02DA>
1565<18> <00B8>
1566<19> <00DF>
1567<1A> <00E6>
1568<1B> <0153>
1569<1C> <00F8>
1570<1D> <00C6>
1571<1E> <0152>
1572<1F> <00D8>
1573<21> <0021>
1574<22> <201D>
1575<27> <2019>
1576<3C> <00A1>
1577<3D> <003D>
1578<3E> <00BF>
1579<5C> <201C>
1580<5F> <02D9>
1581<60> <2018>
1582<7D> <02DD>
1583<7E> <007E>
1584<7F> <00A8>
1585endbfchar
1586endcmap
1587CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
1588end
1589end
1590%%EndResource
1591%%EOF
1592    }\endgroup
1593  \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{%
1594    \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
1595  }%
1596%
1597% \cmapOT1IT
1598  \begingroup
1599    \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
1600    \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
1601%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
1602%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
1603%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0)
1604%%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0)
1605%%Version: 1.000
1606%%EndComments
1607/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
160812 dict begin
1609begincmap
1610/CIDSystemInfo
1611<< /Registry (TeX)
1612/Ordering (OT1IT)
1613/Supplement 0
1614>> def
1615/CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def
1616/CMapType 2 def
16171 begincodespacerange
1618<00> <7F>
1619endcodespacerange
16208 beginbfrange
1621<00> <01> <0393>
1622<09> <0A> <03A8>
1623<25> <26> <0025>
1624<28> <3B> <0028>
1625<3F> <5B> <003F>
1626<5D> <5E> <005D>
1627<61> <7A> <0061>
1628<7B> <7C> <2013>
1629endbfrange
163042 beginbfchar
1631<02> <0398>
1632<03> <039B>
1633<04> <039E>
1634<05> <03A0>
1635<06> <03A3>
1636<07> <03D2>
1637<08> <03A6>
1638<0B> <00660066>
1639<0C> <00660069>
1640<0D> <0066006C>
1641<0E> <006600660069>
1642<0F> <00660066006C>
1643<10> <0131>
1644<11> <0237>
1645<12> <0060>
1646<13> <00B4>
1647<14> <02C7>
1648<15> <02D8>
1649<16> <00AF>
1650<17> <02DA>
1651<18> <00B8>
1652<19> <00DF>
1653<1A> <00E6>
1654<1B> <0153>
1655<1C> <00F8>
1656<1D> <00C6>
1657<1E> <0152>
1658<1F> <00D8>
1659<21> <0021>
1660<22> <201D>
1661<23> <0023>
1662<24> <00A3>
1663<27> <2019>
1664<3C> <00A1>
1665<3D> <003D>
1666<3E> <00BF>
1667<5C> <201C>
1668<5F> <02D9>
1669<60> <2018>
1670<7D> <02DD>
1671<7E> <007E>
1672<7F> <00A8>
1673endbfchar
1674endcmap
1675CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
1676end
1677end
1678%%EndResource
1679%%EOF
1680    }\endgroup
1681  \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{%
1682    \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
1683  }%
1684%
1685% \cmapOT1TT
1686  \begingroup
1687    \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
1688    \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
1689%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
1690%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
1691%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0)
1692%%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0)
1693%%Version: 1.000
1694%%EndComments
1695/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
169612 dict begin
1697begincmap
1698/CIDSystemInfo
1699<< /Registry (TeX)
1700/Ordering (OT1TT)
1701/Supplement 0
1702>> def
1703/CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def
1704/CMapType 2 def
17051 begincodespacerange
1706<00> <7F>
1707endcodespacerange
17085 beginbfrange
1709<00> <01> <0393>
1710<09> <0A> <03A8>
1711<21> <26> <0021>
1712<28> <5F> <0028>
1713<61> <7E> <0061>
1714endbfrange
171532 beginbfchar
1716<02> <0398>
1717<03> <039B>
1718<04> <039E>
1719<05> <03A0>
1720<06> <03A3>
1721<07> <03D2>
1722<08> <03A6>
1723<0B> <2191>
1724<0C> <2193>
1725<0D> <0027>
1726<0E> <00A1>
1727<0F> <00BF>
1728<10> <0131>
1729<11> <0237>
1730<12> <0060>
1731<13> <00B4>
1732<14> <02C7>
1733<15> <02D8>
1734<16> <00AF>
1735<17> <02DA>
1736<18> <00B8>
1737<19> <00DF>
1738<1A> <00E6>
1739<1B> <0153>
1740<1C> <00F8>
1741<1D> <00C6>
1742<1E> <0152>
1743<1F> <00D8>
1744<20> <2423>
1745<27> <2019>
1746<60> <2018>
1747<7F> <00A8>
1748endbfchar
1749endcmap
1750CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
1751end
1752end
1753%%EndResource
1754%%EOF
1755    }\endgroup
1756  \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{%
1757    \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
1758  }%
1759\fi\fi
1760
1761
1762% Set the font macro #1 to the font named \fontprefix#2.
1763% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap
1764% encoding (only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, or empty to omit).
1765% Example:
1766% #1 = \textrm
1767% #2 = \rmshape
1768% #3 = 10
1769% #4 = \mainmagstep
1770% #5 = OT1
1771%
1772\def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{%
1773  \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4
1774  \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1%
1775}
1776% This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty.
1777\let\cmap\gobble
1778%
1779% (end of cmaps)
1780
1781% Use cm as the default font prefix.
1782% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
1783% before you read in texinfo.tex.
1784\ifx\fontprefix\thisisundefined
1785\def\fontprefix{cm}
1786\fi
1787% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
1788\def\rmshape{r}
1789\def\rmbshape{bx}               % where the normal face is bold
1790\def\bfshape{b}
1791\def\bxshape{bx}
1792\def\ttshape{tt}
1793\def\ttbshape{tt}
1794\def\ttslshape{sltt}
1795\def\itshape{ti}
1796\def\itbshape{bxti}
1797\def\slshape{sl}
1798\def\slbshape{bxsl}
1799\def\sfshape{ss}
1800\def\sfbshape{ss}
1801\def\scshape{csc}
1802\def\scbshape{csc}
1803
1804% Definitions for a main text size of 11pt.  (The default in Texinfo.)
1805%
1806\def\definetextfontsizexi{%
1807% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1).
1808\def\textnominalsize{11pt}
1809\edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf}
1810\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1811\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
1812\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1813\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
1814\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1815\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1816\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1817\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
1818\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
1819\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
1820\def\textecsize{1095}
1821
1822% A few fonts for @defun names and args.
1823\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
1824\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
1825\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
1826\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
1827
1828% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
1829\def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
1830\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
1831\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
1832\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
1833\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
1834\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
1835\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
1836\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
1837\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
1838\font\smalli=cmmi9
1839\font\smallsy=cmsy9
1840\def\smallecsize{0900}
1841
1842% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
1843\def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
1844\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
1845\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
1846\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
1847\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
1848\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
1849\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
1850\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
1851\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
1852\font\smalleri=cmmi8
1853\font\smallersy=cmsy8
1854\def\smallerecsize{0800}
1855
1856% Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
1857\def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
1858\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
1859\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
1860\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
1861\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
1862\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
1863\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
1864\let\titlebf=\titlerm
1865\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
1866\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
1867\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
1868\def\titleecsize{2074}
1869
1870% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
1871\def\chapnominalsize{17pt}
1872\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1}
1873\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT}
1874\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
1875\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
1876\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
1877\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1}
1878\let\chapbf=\chaprm
1879\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
1880\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
1881\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
1882\def\chapecsize{1728}
1883
1884% Section fonts (14.4pt).
1885\def\secnominalsize{14pt}
1886\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
1887\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
1888\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
1889\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
1890\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
1891\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
1892\let\secbf\secrm
1893\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
1894\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
1895\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
1896\def\sececsize{1440}
1897
1898% Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
1899\def\ssecnominalsize{13pt}
1900\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
1901\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT}
1902\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
1903\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
1904\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT}
1905\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
1906\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
1907\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
1908\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
1909\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
1910\def\ssececsize{1200}
1911
1912% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt).
1913\def\reducednominalsize{10pt}
1914\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
1915\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
1916\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
1917\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
1918\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
1919\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
1920\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
1921\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
1922\font\reducedi=cmmi10
1923\font\reducedsy=cmsy10
1924\def\reducedecsize{1000}
1925
1926\textleading = 13.2pt % line spacing for 11pt CM
1927\textfonts            % reset the current fonts
1928\rm
1929} % end of 11pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizexi
1930
1931
1932% Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with
1933% section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit.  This is for the GNU
1934% Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual.  Maybe other manuals in the
1935% future.  Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt.
1936%
1937\def\definetextfontsizex{%
1938% Text fonts (10pt).
1939\def\textnominalsize{10pt}
1940\edef\mainmagstep{1000}
1941\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1942\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
1943\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1944\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
1945\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1946\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1947\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
1948\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
1949\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
1950\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
1951\def\textecsize{1000}
1952
1953% A few fonts for @defun names and args.
1954\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
1955\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
1956\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
1957\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
1958
1959% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
1960\def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
1961\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
1962\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
1963\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
1964\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
1965\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
1966\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
1967\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
1968\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
1969\font\smalli=cmmi9
1970\font\smallsy=cmsy9
1971\def\smallecsize{0900}
1972
1973% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
1974\def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
1975\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
1976\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
1977\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
1978\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
1979\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
1980\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
1981\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
1982\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
1983\font\smalleri=cmmi8
1984\font\smallersy=cmsy8
1985\def\smallerecsize{0800}
1986
1987% Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
1988\def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
1989\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
1990\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
1991\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
1992\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
1993\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
1994\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
1995\let\titlebf=\titlerm
1996\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
1997\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
1998\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
1999\def\titleecsize{2074}
2000
2001% Chapter fonts (14.4pt).
2002\def\chapnominalsize{14pt}
2003\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
2004\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
2005\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
2006\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
2007\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
2008\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
2009\let\chapbf\chaprm
2010\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
2011\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
2012\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
2013\def\chapecsize{1440}
2014
2015% Section fonts (12pt).
2016\def\secnominalsize{12pt}
2017\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
2018\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT}
2019\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
2020\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
2021\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
2022\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
2023\let\secbf\secrm
2024\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
2025\font\seci=cmmi12
2026\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1
2027\def\sececsize{1200}
2028
2029% Subsection fonts (10pt).
2030\def\ssecnominalsize{10pt}
2031\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
2032\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
2033\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
2034\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
2035\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
2036\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
2037\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
2038\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
2039\font\sseci=cmmi10
2040\font\ssecsy=cmsy10
2041\def\ssececsize{1000}
2042
2043% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (9pt).
2044\def\reducednominalsize{9pt}
2045\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
2046\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
2047\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
2048\setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
2049\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
2050\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
2051\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
2052\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
2053\font\reducedi=cmmi9
2054\font\reducedsy=cmsy9
2055\def\reducedecsize{0900}
2056
2057\divide\parskip by 2  % reduce space between paragraphs
2058\textleading = 12pt   % line spacing for 10pt CM
2059\textfonts            % reset the current fonts
2060\rm
2061} % end of 10pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizex
2062
2063
2064% We provide the user-level command
2065%   @fonttextsize 10
2066% (or 11) to redefine the text font size.  pt is assumed.
2067%
2068\def\xiword{11}
2069\def\xword{10}
2070\def\xwordpt{10pt}
2071%
2072\parseargdef\fonttextsize{%
2073  \def\textsizearg{#1}%
2074  %\wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}%
2075  %
2076  % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since
2077  % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless.
2078  %
2079 \begingroup \globaldefs=1
2080  \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex
2081  \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi
2082  \else
2083    \errhelp=\EMsimple
2084    \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'}
2085  \fi\fi
2086 \endgroup
2087}
2088
2089
2090% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
2091% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families.  Since
2092% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except
2093% in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and
2094% \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts).
2095%
2096\def\resetmathfonts{%
2097  \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy
2098  \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf
2099  \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf
2100}
2101
2102% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
2103% of just \STYLE.  We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the
2104% current \fam for math mode.  Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire
2105% \tenSTYLE to set the current font.
2106%
2107% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower)
2108% and \lllsize (three sizes lower).  These relative commands are used in
2109% the LaTeX logo and acronyms.
2110%
2111% This all needs generalizing, badly.
2112%
2113\def\textfonts{%
2114  \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
2115  \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
2116  \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy
2117  \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
2118  \def\curfontsize{text}%
2119  \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
2120  \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}}
2121\def\titlefonts{%
2122  \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
2123  \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
2124  \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
2125  \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
2126  \def\curfontsize{title}%
2127  \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}%
2128  \resetmathfonts \setleading{27pt}}
2129\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1}}
2130\def\chapfonts{%
2131  \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
2132  \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
2133  \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy
2134  \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
2135  \def\curfontsize{chap}%
2136  \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}%
2137  \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
2138\def\secfonts{%
2139  \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
2140  \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
2141  \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy
2142  \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
2143  \def\curfontsize{sec}%
2144  \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}%
2145  \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
2146\def\subsecfonts{%
2147  \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
2148  \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
2149  \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy
2150  \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
2151  \def\curfontsize{ssec}%
2152  \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}%
2153  \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
2154\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts
2155\def\reducedfonts{%
2156  \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl
2157  \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc
2158  \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy
2159  \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl
2160  \def\curfontsize{reduced}%
2161  \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
2162  \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
2163\def\smallfonts{%
2164  \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
2165  \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
2166  \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
2167  \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
2168  \def\curfontsize{small}%
2169  \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
2170  \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
2171\def\smallerfonts{%
2172  \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl
2173  \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc
2174  \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy
2175  \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl
2176  \def\curfontsize{smaller}%
2177  \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
2178  \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}}
2179
2180% Fonts for short table of contents.
2181\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
2182\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}  % no cmb12
2183\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
2184\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
2185
2186% Define these just so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
2187\def\angleleft{$\langle$}
2188\def\angleright{$\rangle$}
2189
2190% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments.
2191\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts
2192
2193% About \smallexamplefonts.  If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample
2194% can fit this many characters:
2195%   8.5x11=86   smallbook=72  a4=90  a5=69
2196% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:
2197%   8.5x11=90+  smallbook=80  a4=90+  a5=77
2198% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth
2199% the additional smallness of 8pt.  So I'm making the default 9pt.
2200%
2201% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt):
2202%   8.5x11=71  smallbook=60  a4=75  a5=58
2203% --karl, 24jan03.
2204
2205% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
2206%
2207\definetextfontsizexi
2208
2209
2210\message{markup,}
2211
2212% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font.  Since all the
2213% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
2214% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
2215% this property, we can check that font parameter.
2216%
2217\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
2218
2219% Markup style infrastructure.  \defmarkupstylesetup\INITMACRO will
2220% define and register \INITMACRO to be called on markup style changes.
2221% \INITMACRO can check \currentmarkupstyle for the innermost
2222% style and the set of \ifmarkupSTYLE switches for all styles
2223% currently in effect.
2224\newif\ifmarkupvar
2225\newif\ifmarkupsamp
2226\newif\ifmarkupkey
2227%\newif\ifmarkupfile % @file == @samp.
2228%\newif\ifmarkupoption % @option == @samp.
2229\newif\ifmarkupcode
2230\newif\ifmarkupkbd
2231%\newif\ifmarkupenv % @env == @code.
2232%\newif\ifmarkupcommand % @command == @code.
2233\newif\ifmarkuptex % @tex (and part of @math, for now).
2234\newif\ifmarkupexample
2235\newif\ifmarkupverb
2236\newif\ifmarkupverbatim
2237
2238\let\currentmarkupstyle\empty
2239
2240\def\setupmarkupstyle#1{%
2241  \csname markup#1true\endcsname
2242  \def\currentmarkupstyle{#1}%
2243  \markupstylesetup
2244}
2245
2246\let\markupstylesetup\empty
2247
2248\def\defmarkupstylesetup#1{%
2249  \expandafter\def\expandafter\markupstylesetup
2250    \expandafter{\markupstylesetup #1}%
2251  \def#1%
2252}
2253
2254% Markup style setup for left and right quotes.
2255\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuplq{%
2256  \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp
2257    \csname markupsetuplq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
2258  \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuplqdefault \else \temp \fi
2259}
2260
2261\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuprq{%
2262  \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp
2263    \csname markupsetuprq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
2264  \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuprqdefault \else \temp \fi
2265}
2266
2267{
2268\catcode`\'=\active
2269\catcode`\`=\active
2270
2271\gdef\markupsetuplqdefault{\let`\lq}
2272\gdef\markupsetuprqdefault{\let'\rq}
2273
2274\gdef\markupsetcodequoteleft{\let`\codequoteleft}
2275\gdef\markupsetcodequoteright{\let'\codequoteright}
2276}
2277
2278\let\markupsetuplqcode \markupsetcodequoteleft
2279\let\markupsetuprqcode \markupsetcodequoteright
2280%
2281\let\markupsetuplqexample \markupsetcodequoteleft
2282\let\markupsetuprqexample \markupsetcodequoteright
2283%
2284\let\markupsetuplqkbd     \markupsetcodequoteleft
2285\let\markupsetuprqkbd     \markupsetcodequoteright
2286%
2287\let\markupsetuplqsamp \markupsetcodequoteleft
2288\let\markupsetuprqsamp \markupsetcodequoteright
2289%
2290\let\markupsetuplqverb \markupsetcodequoteleft
2291\let\markupsetuprqverb \markupsetcodequoteright
2292%
2293\let\markupsetuplqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteleft
2294\let\markupsetuprqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteright
2295
2296% Allow an option to not use regular directed right quote/apostrophe
2297% (char 0x27), but instead the undirected quote from cmtt (char 0x0d).
2298% The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it the default, but it
2299% works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least evince), the
2300% lilypond developers report.  xpdf does work with the regular 0x27.
2301%
2302\def\codequoteright{%
2303  \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
2304    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
2305      '%
2306    \else \char'15 \fi
2307  \else \char'15 \fi
2308}
2309%
2310% and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent.
2311% Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like
2312% the code environments to do likewise.
2313%
2314\def\codequoteleft{%
2315  \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
2316    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
2317      % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
2318      % \relax disables Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
2319      \relax`%
2320    \else \char'22 \fi
2321  \else \char'22 \fi
2322}
2323
2324% Commands to set the quote options.
2325% 
2326\parseargdef\codequoteundirected{%
2327  \def\temp{#1}%
2328  \ifx\temp\onword
2329    \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname
2330      = t%
2331  \else\ifx\temp\offword
2332    \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname
2333      = \relax
2334  \else
2335    \errhelp = \EMsimple
2336    \errmessage{Unknown @codequoteundirected value `\temp', must be on|off}%
2337  \fi\fi
2338}
2339%
2340\parseargdef\codequotebacktick{%
2341  \def\temp{#1}%
2342  \ifx\temp\onword
2343    \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname
2344      = t%
2345  \else\ifx\temp\offword
2346    \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname
2347      = \relax
2348  \else
2349    \errhelp = \EMsimple
2350    \errmessage{Unknown @codequotebacktick value `\temp', must be on|off}%
2351  \fi\fi
2352}
2353
2354% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
2355\def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq}
2356
2357% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
2358\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
2359
2360% Font commands.
2361
2362% #1 is the font command (\sl or \it), #2 is the text to slant.
2363% If we are in a monospaced environment, however, 1) always use \ttsl,
2364% and 2) do not add an italic correction.
2365\def\dosmartslant#1#2{%
2366  \ifusingtt 
2367    {{\ttsl #2}\let\next=\relax}%
2368    {\def\next{{#1#2}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}}%
2369  \next
2370}
2371\def\smartslanted{\dosmartslant\sl}
2372\def\smartitalic{\dosmartslant\it}
2373
2374% Output an italic correction unless \next (presumed to be the following
2375% character) is such as not to need one.
2376\def\smartitaliccorrection{%
2377  \ifx\next,%
2378  \else\ifx\next-%
2379  \else\ifx\next.%
2380  \else\ptexslash
2381  \fi\fi\fi
2382  \aftersmartic
2383}
2384
2385% Unconditional use \ttsl, and no ic.  @var is set to this for defuns.
2386\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}}
2387
2388% @cite is like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl.  We never want
2389% ttsl for book titles, do we?
2390\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}
2391
2392\def\aftersmartic{}
2393\def\var#1{%
2394  \let\saveaftersmartic = \aftersmartic
2395  \def\aftersmartic{\null\let\aftersmartic=\saveaftersmartic}%
2396  \smartslanted{#1}%
2397}
2398
2399\let\i=\smartitalic
2400\let\slanted=\smartslanted
2401\let\dfn=\smartslanted
2402\let\emph=\smartitalic
2403
2404% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
2405\def\r#1{{\rm #1}}              % roman font
2406\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}}       % smallcaps font
2407\def\ii#1{{\it #1}}             % italic font
2408
2409% @b, explicit bold.  Also @strong.
2410\def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
2411\let\strong=\b
2412
2413% @sansserif, explicit sans.
2414\def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}}
2415
2416% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
2417% the end of a paragraph.  Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
2418% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
2419%
2420\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1  \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
2421\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
2422
2423% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
2424% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and
2425% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up.
2426%
2427\catcode`@=11
2428  \def\plainfrenchspacing{%
2429    \sfcode\dotChar  =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m
2430    \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m
2431    \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends
2432  }
2433  \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{%
2434    \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000
2435    \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250
2436    \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends
2437  }
2438\catcode`@=\other
2439\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default
2440
2441% @t, explicit typewriter.
2442\def\t#1{%
2443  {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}%
2444  \null
2445}
2446
2447% @samp.
2448\def\samp#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{samp}\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}}
2449
2450% @indicateurl is \samp, that is, with quotes.
2451\let\indicateurl=\samp
2452
2453% @code (and similar) prints in typewriter, but with spaces the same
2454% size as normal in the surrounding text, without hyphenation, etc.
2455% This is a subroutine for that.
2456\def\tclose#1{%
2457  {%
2458    % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
2459    \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
2460    %
2461    % Switch to typewriter.
2462    \tt
2463    %
2464    % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
2465    \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
2466    %
2467    % Turn off hyphenation.
2468    \nohyphenation
2469    %
2470    \rawbackslash
2471    \plainfrenchspacing
2472    #1%
2473  }%
2474  \null % reset spacefactor to 1000
2475}
2476
2477% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code.
2478% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
2479% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
2480%
2481% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
2482% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
2483% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
2484% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
2485%  -- rms.
2486{
2487  \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active
2488  \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active
2489  \global\let'=\rq \global\let`=\lq  % default definitions
2490  %
2491  \global\def\code{\begingroup
2492    \setupmarkupstyle{code}%
2493    % The following should really be moved into \setupmarkupstyle handlers.
2494    \catcode\dashChar=\active  \catcode\underChar=\active
2495    \ifallowcodebreaks
2496     \let-\codedash
2497     \let_\codeunder
2498    \else
2499     \let-\normaldash
2500     \let_\realunder
2501    \fi
2502    \codex
2503  }
2504}
2505
2506\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
2507
2508\def\normaldash{-}
2509\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
2510\def\codeunder{%
2511  % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work.  In math mode, _
2512  % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
2513  % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us
2514  % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.
2515  \ifusingtt{\ifmmode
2516               \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.
2517             \else\normalunderscore \fi
2518             \discretionary{}{}{}}%
2519            {\_}%
2520}
2521
2522% An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g.,
2523% each of the four underscores in __typeof__.  This is bad.
2524% @allowcodebreaks provides a document-level way to turn breaking at -
2525% and _ on and off.
2526%
2527\newif\ifallowcodebreaks  \allowcodebreakstrue
2528
2529\def\keywordtrue{true}
2530\def\keywordfalse{false}
2531
2532\parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{%
2533  \def\txiarg{#1}%
2534  \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue
2535    \allowcodebreakstrue
2536  \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse
2537    \allowcodebreaksfalse
2538  \else
2539    \errhelp = \EMsimple
2540    \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg', must be true|false}%
2541  \fi\fi
2542}
2543
2544% For @command, @env, @file, @option quotes seem unnecessary,
2545% so use \code rather than \samp.
2546\let\command=\code
2547\let\env=\code
2548\let\file=\code
2549\let\option=\code
2550
2551% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)
2552% second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third
2553% arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url
2554% itself.  First (mandatory) arg is the url.
2555% (This \urefnobreak definition isn't used now, leaving it for a while
2556% for comparison.)
2557\def\urefnobreak#1{\dourefnobreak #1,,,\finish}
2558\def\dourefnobreak#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup
2559  \unsepspaces
2560  \pdfurl{#1}%
2561  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
2562  \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
2563    \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
2564  \else
2565    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
2566    \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
2567      \ifpdf
2568        \unhbox0             % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
2569      \else
2570        \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
2571      \fi
2572    \else
2573      \code{#1}% only url given, so show it
2574    \fi
2575  \fi
2576  \endlink
2577\endgroup}
2578
2579% This \urefbreak definition is the active one.
2580\def\urefbreak{\begingroup \urefcatcodes \dourefbreak}
2581\let\uref=\urefbreak
2582\def\dourefbreak#1{\urefbreakfinish #1,,,\finish}
2583\def\urefbreakfinish#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% doesn't work in @example
2584  \unsepspaces
2585  \pdfurl{#1}%
2586  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
2587  \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
2588    \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
2589  \else
2590    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
2591    \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
2592      \ifpdf
2593        \unhbox0             % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
2594      \else
2595        \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
2596      \fi
2597    \else
2598      \urefcode{#1}% only url given, so show it
2599    \fi
2600  \fi
2601  \endlink
2602\endgroup}
2603
2604% Allow line breaks around only a few characters (only).
2605\def\urefcatcodes{%
2606  \catcode\ampChar=\active   \catcode\dotChar=\active
2607  \catcode\hashChar=\active  \catcode\questChar=\active
2608  \catcode\slashChar=\active
2609}
2610{
2611  \urefcatcodes
2612  %
2613  \global\def\urefcode{\begingroup
2614    \setupmarkupstyle{code}%
2615    \urefcatcodes
2616    \let&\urefcodeamp
2617    \let.\urefcodedot
2618    \let#\urefcodehash
2619    \let?\urefcodequest
2620    \let/\urefcodeslash
2621    \codex
2622  }
2623  %
2624  % By default, they are just regular characters.
2625  \global\def&{\normalamp}
2626  \global\def.{\normaldot}
2627  \global\def#{\normalhash}
2628  \global\def?{\normalquest}
2629  \global\def/{\normalslash}
2630}
2631
2632% we put a little stretch before and after the breakable chars, to help
2633% line breaking of long url's.  The unequal skips make look better in
2634% cmtt at least, especially for dots.
2635\def\urefprestretch{\urefprebreak \hskip0pt plus.13em }
2636\def\urefpoststretch{\urefpostbreak \hskip0pt plus.1em }
2637%
2638\def\urefcodeamp{\urefprestretch \&\urefpoststretch}
2639\def\urefcodedot{\urefprestretch .\urefpoststretch}
2640\def\urefcodehash{\urefprestretch \#\urefpoststretch}
2641\def\urefcodequest{\urefprestretch ?\urefpoststretch}
2642\def\urefcodeslash{\futurelet\next\urefcodeslashfinish}
2643{
2644  \catcode`\/=\active
2645  \global\def\urefcodeslashfinish{%
2646    \urefprestretch \slashChar
2647    % Allow line break only after the final / in a sequence of
2648    % slashes, to avoid line break between the slashes in http://.
2649    \ifx\next/\else \urefpoststretch \fi
2650  }
2651}
2652
2653% One more complication: by default we'll break after the special
2654% characters, but some people like to break before the special chars, so
2655% allow that.  Also allow no breaking at all, for manual control.
2656% 
2657\parseargdef\urefbreakstyle{%
2658  \def\txiarg{#1}%
2659  \ifx\txiarg\wordnone
2660    \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak}
2661  \else\ifx\txiarg\wordbefore
2662    \def\urefprebreak{\allowbreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak}
2663  \else\ifx\txiarg\wordafter
2664    \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\allowbreak}
2665  \else
2666    \errhelp = \EMsimple
2667    \errmessage{Unknown @urefbreakstyle setting `\txiarg'}%
2668  \fi\fi\fi
2669}
2670\def\wordafter{after}
2671\def\wordbefore{before}
2672\def\wordnone{none}
2673
2674\urefbreakstyle after
2675
2676% @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it.
2677%
2678\let\url=\uref
2679
2680% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
2681% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
2682%
2683%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
2684\ifpdf
2685  \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
2686  \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
2687    \unsepspaces
2688    \pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
2689    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
2690    \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
2691    \endlink
2692  \endgroup}
2693\else
2694  \let\email=\uref
2695\fi
2696
2697% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
2698%   `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
2699%   or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
2700\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{%
2701  \def\txiarg{#1}%
2702  \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct
2703    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
2704  \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample
2705    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
2706  \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode
2707    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
2708  \else
2709    \errhelp = \EMsimple
2710    \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle setting `\txiarg'}%
2711  \fi\fi\fi
2712}
2713\def\worddistinct{distinct}
2714\def\wordexample{example}
2715\def\wordcode{code}
2716
2717% Default is `distinct'.
2718\kbdinputstyle distinct
2719
2720% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
2721% then @kbd has no effect.
2722\def\kbd#1{{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdsub\look??\par}}
2723
2724\def\xkey{\key}
2725\def\kbdsub#1#2#3\par{%
2726  \def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
2727  \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
2728  \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi
2729  \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi
2730}
2731
2732% definition of @key that produces a lozenge.  Doesn't adjust to text size.
2733%\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
2734%\font\keysy=cmsy9
2735%\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
2736%  \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
2737%    \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
2738%     \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
2739%    \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
2740%  \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
2741
2742% definition of @key with no lozenge.  If the current font is already
2743% monospace, don't change it; that way, we respect @kbdinputstyle.  But
2744% if it isn't monospace, then use \tt.
2745%
2746\def\key#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{key}%
2747  \nohyphenation
2748  \ifmonospace\else\tt\fi
2749  #1}\null}
2750
2751% @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...}
2752\def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup}
2753
2754% @clickstyle @arrow   (by default)
2755\parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}}
2756\def\click{\arrow}
2757
2758% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'.  The only reason for the
2759% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
2760%
2761\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
2762
2763% @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
2764% and it is not used as such in any manual I can find.  We need it for
2765% Polish suppressed-l.  --karl, 22sep96.
2766%\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
2767
2768% @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like.
2769% We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for
2770% all-uppercase.
2771%
2772\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish}
2773\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{%
2774  {\selectfonts\lsize #1}%
2775  \def\temp{#2}%
2776  \ifx\temp\empty \else
2777    \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
2778  \fi
2779  \null % reset \spacefactor=1000
2780}
2781
2782% @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like.
2783% No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing.
2784%
2785\def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish}
2786\def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{%
2787  {\plainfrenchspacing #1}%
2788  \def\temp{#2}%
2789  \ifx\temp\empty \else
2790    \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
2791  \fi
2792  \null % reset \spacefactor=1000
2793}
2794
2795% @asis just yields its argument.  Used with @table, for example.
2796%
2797\def\asis#1{#1}
2798
2799% @math outputs its argument in math mode.
2800%
2801% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
2802% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}.  So make
2803% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam,
2804% which is what @var uses.
2805{
2806  \catcode`\_ = \active
2807  \gdef\mathunderscore{%
2808    \catcode`\_=\active
2809    \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
2810  }
2811}
2812% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a math (or tt) \.
2813% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (for no
2814% particular reason), but this is not advertised and we don't care.
2815%
2816% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
2817\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
2818%
2819\def\math{%
2820  \tex
2821  \mathunderscore
2822  \let\\ = \mathbackslash
2823  \mathactive
2824  % make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode
2825  \let\"=\ddot
2826  \let\'=\acute
2827  \let\==\bar
2828  \let\^=\hat
2829  \let\`=\grave
2830  \let\u=\breve
2831  \let\v=\check
2832  \let\~=\tilde
2833  \let\dotaccent=\dot
2834  $\finishmath
2835}
2836\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup}  % Close the group opened by \tex.
2837
2838% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
2839% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument
2840% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
2841%
2842{
2843  \catcode`^ = \active
2844  \catcode`< = \active
2845  \catcode`> = \active
2846  \catcode`+ = \active
2847  \catcode`' = \active
2848  \gdef\mathactive{%
2849    \let^ = \ptexhat
2850    \let< = \ptexless
2851    \let> = \ptexgtr
2852    \let+ = \ptexplus
2853    \let' = \ptexquoteright
2854  }
2855}
2856
2857% ctrl is no longer a Texinfo command, but leave this definition for fun.
2858\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
2859
2860% @inlinefmt{FMTNAME,PROCESSED-TEXT} and @inlineraw{FMTNAME,RAW-TEXT}.
2861% Ignore unless FMTNAME == tex; then it is like @iftex and @tex,
2862% except specified as a normal braced arg, so no newlines to worry about.
2863% 
2864\def\outfmtnametex{tex}
2865%
2866\long\def\inlinefmt#1{\doinlinefmt #1,\finish}
2867\long\def\doinlinefmt#1,#2,\finish{%
2868  \def\inlinefmtname{#1}%
2869  \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi
2870}
2871% For raw, must switch into @tex before parsing the argument, to avoid
2872% setting catcodes prematurely.  Doing it this way means that, for
2873% example, @inlineraw{html, foo{bar} gets a parse error instead of being
2874% ignored.  But this isn't important because if people want a literal
2875% *right* brace they would have to use a command anyway, so they may as
2876% well use a command to get a left brace too.  We could re-use the
2877% delimiter character idea from \verb, but it seems like overkill.
2878% 
2879\long\def\inlineraw{\tex \doinlineraw}
2880\long\def\doinlineraw#1{\doinlinerawtwo #1,\finish}
2881\def\doinlinerawtwo#1,#2,\finish{%
2882  \def\inlinerawname{#1}%
2883  \ifx\inlinerawname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi
2884  \endgroup % close group opened by \tex.
2885}
2886
2887
2888\message{glyphs,}
2889% and logos.
2890
2891% @@ prints an @, as does @atchar{}.
2892\def\@{\char64 }
2893\let\atchar=\@
2894
2895% @{ @} @lbracechar{} @rbracechar{} all generate brace characters.
2896% Unless we're in typewriter, use \ecfont because the CM text fonts do
2897% not have braces, and we don't want to switch into math.
2898\def\mylbrace{{\ifmonospace\else\ecfont\fi \char123}}
2899\def\myrbrace{{\ifmonospace\else\ecfont\fi \char125}}
2900\let\{=\mylbrace \let\lbracechar=\{
2901\let\}=\myrbrace \let\rbracechar=\}
2902\begingroup
2903  % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices,
2904  % and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files.
2905  \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other
2906  \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
2907  \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other
2908  !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]%
2909  !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]%
2910  !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]%
2911  !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]%
2912!endgroup
2913
2914% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems.
2915\let\comma = ,
2916
2917% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
2918% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
2919\let\, = \ptexc
2920\let\dotaccent = \ptexdot
2921\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
2922\let\tieaccent = \ptext
2923\let\ubaraccent = \ptexb
2924\let\udotaccent = \d
2925
2926% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm
2927% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
2928\def\questiondown{?`}
2929\def\exclamdown{!`}
2930\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}}
2931\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}}
2932
2933% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
2934\def\imacro{i}
2935\def\jmacro{j}
2936\def\dotless#1{%
2937  \def\temp{#1}%
2938  \ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi
2939  \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi
2940  \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
2941  \fi\fi
2942}
2943
2944% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a
2945% period following counts as ending a sentence.  (Idea found in latex.)
2946%
2947\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 }
2948
2949% @LaTeX{} logo.  Not quite the same results as the definition in
2950% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most
2951% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using
2952% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and
2953% \scriptscriptstyle).
2954%
2955\def\LaTeX{%
2956  L\kern-.36em
2957  {\setbox0=\hbox{T}%
2958   \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{%
2959     \ifx\textnominalsize\xwordpt
2960       % for 10pt running text, \lllsize (8pt) is too small for the A in LaTeX.
2961       % Revert to plain's \scriptsize, which is 7pt.
2962       \count255=\the\fam $\fam\count255 \scriptstyle A$%
2963     \else
2964       % For 11pt, we can use our lllsize.
2965       \selectfonts\lllsize A%
2966     \fi
2967     }%
2968     \vss
2969  }}%
2970  \kern-.15em
2971  \TeX
2972}
2973
2974% Some math mode symbols.
2975\def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$}
2976\def\geq{\ifmmode \ge\else $\ge$\fi}
2977\def\leq{\ifmmode \le\else $\le$\fi}
2978\def\minus{\ifmmode -\else $-$\fi}
2979
2980% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font.
2981% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm
2982% typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand,
2983% in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em.  So do
2984% whichever is larger.
2985%
2986\def\dots{%
2987  \leavevmode
2988  \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods
2989  \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em
2990    \dimen0 = \wd0
2991  \else
2992    \dimen0 = 1.5em
2993  \fi
2994  \hbox to \dimen0{%
2995    \hskip 0pt plus.25fil
2996    .\hskip 0pt plus1fil
2997    .\hskip 0pt plus1fil
2998    .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil
2999  }%
3000}
3001
3002% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
3003%
3004\def\enddots{%
3005  \dots
3006  \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor
3007}
3008
3009% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
3010%
3011% Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of
3012% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
3013%
3014\def\point{$\star$}
3015\def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}}
3016\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
3017\def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
3018\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
3019\def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
3020
3021% The @error{} command.
3022% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
3023%
3024\newbox\errorbox
3025%
3026{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
3027\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
3028% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
3029\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf \putworderror\kern-1.5pt}
3030%
3031\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
3032   \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
3033   \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
3034   \vbox{%
3035      \hrule height\dimen2
3036      \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt          % Space to left of text.
3037         \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
3038         \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
3039      \hrule height\dimen2}
3040    \hfil}
3041%
3042\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
3043
3044% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font.
3045%
3046\def\pounds{{\it\$}}
3047
3048% @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style.
3049% We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik
3050% Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and
3051% "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need).
3052% It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym.
3053%
3054% Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore
3055% that.  The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular
3056% font height.
3057%
3058% feymr - regular
3059% feymo - slanted
3060% feybr - bold
3061% feybo - bold slanted
3062%
3063% There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge.
3064% A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide.
3065% Hmm.
3066%
3067% Also doesn't work in math.  Do we need to do math with euro symbols?
3068% Hope not.
3069%
3070%
3071\def\euro{{\eurofont e}}
3072\def\eurofont{%
3073  % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in
3074  % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that
3075  % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the
3076  % font installed.
3077  %
3078  % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale
3079  % that to the current nominal size.
3080  %
3081  % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but
3082  % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts.
3083  %
3084  \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
3085  %
3086  \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
3087    % bold:
3088    \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize
3089  \else
3090    % regular:
3091    \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize
3092  \fi
3093  \thiseurofont
3094}
3095
3096% Glyphs from the EC fonts.  We don't use \let for the aliases, because
3097% sometimes we redefine the original macro, and the alias should reflect
3098% the redefinition.
3099%
3100% Use LaTeX names for the Icelandic letters.
3101\def\DH{{\ecfont \char"D0}} % Eth
3102\def\dh{{\ecfont \char"F0}} % eth
3103\def\TH{{\ecfont \char"DE}} % Thorn
3104\def\th{{\ecfont \char"FE}} % thorn
3105%
3106\def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}}
3107\def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft}
3108\def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}}
3109\def\guillemotright{\guillemetright}
3110\def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}}
3111\def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}}
3112\def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}}
3113\def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}}
3114%
3115% This positioning is not perfect (see the ogonek LaTeX package), but
3116% we have the precomposed glyphs for the most common cases.  We put the
3117% tests to use those glyphs in the single \ogonek macro so we have fewer
3118% dummy definitions to worry about for index entries, etc.
3119%
3120% ogonek is also used with other letters in Lithuanian (IOU), but using
3121% the precomposed glyphs for those is not so easy since they aren't in
3122% the same EC font.
3123\def\ogonek#1{{%
3124  \def\temp{#1}%
3125  \ifx\temp\macrocharA\Aogonek
3126  \else\ifx\temp\macrochara\aogonek
3127  \else\ifx\temp\macrocharE\Eogonek
3128  \else\ifx\temp\macrochare\eogonek
3129  \else
3130    \ecfont \setbox0=\hbox{#1}%
3131    \ifdim\ht0=1ex\accent"0C #1%
3132    \else\ooalign{\unhbox0\crcr\hidewidth\char"0C \hidewidth}%
3133    \fi
3134  \fi\fi\fi\fi
3135  }%
3136}
3137\def\Aogonek{{\ecfont \char"81}}\def\macrocharA{A}
3138\def\aogonek{{\ecfont \char"A1}}\def\macrochara{a}
3139\def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"86}}\def\macrocharE{E}
3140\def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6}}\def\macrochare{e}
3141%
3142% Use the ec* fonts (cm-super in outline format) for non-CM glyphs.
3143\def\ecfont{%
3144  % We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this
3145  % is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German
3146  % quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so
3147  % hopefully nobody will notice/care.
3148  \edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}%
3149  \edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
3150  \ifmonospace
3151    % typewriter:
3152    \font\thisecfont = ectt\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
3153  \else
3154    \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
3155      % bold:
3156      \font\thisecfont = ecb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
3157    \else
3158      % regular:
3159      \font\thisecfont = ec\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
3160    \fi
3161  \fi
3162  \thisecfont
3163}
3164
3165% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle.  The font for the R should really
3166% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now.
3167% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright.
3168%
3169\def\registeredsymbol{%
3170  $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}%
3171               \hfil\crcr\Orb}}%
3172    }$%
3173}
3174
3175% @textdegree - the normal degrees sign.
3176%
3177\def\textdegree{$^\circ$}
3178
3179% Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with:
3180%  Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14)  (68K)  16 APR 2004 02:38
3181% so we'll define it if necessary.
3182%
3183\ifx\Orb\thisisundefined
3184\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D}
3185\fi
3186
3187% Quotes.
3188\chardef\quotedblleft="5C
3189\chardef\quotedblright=`\"
3190\chardef\quoteleft=`\`
3191\chardef\quoteright=`\'
3192
3193
3194\message{page headings,}
3195
3196\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
3197\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
3198
3199% First the title page.  Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
3200\newif\ifseenauthor
3201\newif\iffinishedtitlepage
3202
3203% Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
3204% user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage.
3205%
3206\newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
3207 \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
3208\newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
3209 \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
3210
3211\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{%
3212  \begingroup \hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
3213  \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
3214
3215\envdef\titlepage{%
3216  % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage.
3217  \begingroup
3218    \parindent=0pt \textfonts
3219    % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
3220    \vglue\titlepagetopglue
3221    % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
3222    \finishedtitlepagetrue
3223    %
3224    % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
3225    % at the top of the second.  We don't want the ragged left on the second.
3226    \let\oldpage = \page
3227    \def\page{%
3228      \iffinishedtitlepage\else
3229	 \finishtitlepage
3230      \fi
3231      \let\page = \oldpage
3232      \page
3233      \null
3234    }%
3235}
3236
3237\def\Etitlepage{%
3238    \iffinishedtitlepage\else
3239	\finishtitlepage
3240    \fi
3241    % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
3242    % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
3243    % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
3244    % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
3245    \oldpage
3246  \endgroup
3247  %
3248  % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
3249  % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
3250  \HEADINGSon
3251  %
3252  % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
3253  \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
3254    \shortcontents
3255    \contents
3256    \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
3257    \global\let\contents = \relax
3258  \fi
3259  %
3260  \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
3261    \contents
3262    \global\let\contents = \relax
3263    \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
3264  \fi
3265}
3266
3267\def\finishtitlepage{%
3268  \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
3269  \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
3270  \finishedtitlepagetrue
3271}
3272
3273% Settings used for typesetting titles: no hyphenation, no indentation,
3274% don't worry much about spacing, ragged right.  This should be used
3275% inside a \vbox, and fonts need to be set appropriately first.  Because
3276% it is always used for titles, nothing else, we call \rmisbold.  \par
3277% should be specified before the end of the \vbox, since a vbox is a group.
3278% 
3279\def\raggedtitlesettings{%
3280  \rmisbold
3281  \hyphenpenalty=10000
3282  \parindent=0pt
3283  \tolerance=5000
3284  \ptexraggedright
3285}
3286
3287% Macros to be used within @titlepage:
3288
3289\let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
3290\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}
3291
3292\parseargdef\title{%
3293  \checkenv\titlepage
3294  \vbox{\titlefonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}%
3295  % print a rule at the page bottom also.
3296  \finishedtitlepagefalse
3297  \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt
3298}
3299
3300\parseargdef\subtitle{%
3301  \checkenv\titlepage
3302  {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}%
3303}
3304
3305% @author should come last, but may come many times.
3306% It can also be used inside @quotation.
3307%
3308\parseargdef\author{%
3309  \def\temp{\quotation}%
3310  \ifx\thisenv\temp
3311    \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation.
3312  \else
3313    \checkenv\titlepage
3314    \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi
3315    {\secfonts\rmisbold \leftline{#1}}%
3316  \fi
3317}
3318
3319
3320% Set up page headings and footings.
3321
3322\let\thispage=\folio
3323
3324\newtoks\evenheadline    % headline on even pages
3325\newtoks\oddheadline     % headline on odd pages
3326\newtoks\evenfootline    % footline on even pages
3327\newtoks\oddfootline     % footline on odd pages
3328
3329% Now make TeX use those variables
3330\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
3331                            \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
3332\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
3333                            \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
3334\let\HEADINGShook=\relax
3335
3336% Commands to set those variables.
3337% For example, this is what  @headings on  does
3338% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
3339% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
3340% @evenfooting @thisfile||
3341% @oddfooting ||@thisfile
3342
3343
3344\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
3345\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
3346\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
3347\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
3348
3349\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
3350\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
3351\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
3352\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
3353
3354\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
3355
3356\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
3357\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
3358\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
3359\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
3360
3361\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
3362\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
3363\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
3364  \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
3365  %
3366  % Leave some space for the footline.  Hopefully ok to assume
3367  % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
3368  \global\advance\pageheight by -12pt
3369  \global\advance\vsize by -12pt
3370}
3371
3372\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
3373
3374% @evenheadingmarks top     \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page
3375% @evenheadingmarks bottom  \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page
3376%
3377% The same set of arguments for:
3378%
3379% @oddheadingmarks
3380% @evenfootingmarks
3381% @oddfootingmarks
3382% @everyheadingmarks
3383% @everyfootingmarks
3384
3385\def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}}
3386\def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}}
3387\def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}}
3388\def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}}
3389\def\everyheadingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1}
3390                          \headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} }
3391\def\everyfootingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1}
3392                          \headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} }
3393% #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom.
3394\def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {%
3395  \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname
3396  \global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp
3397}
3398
3399\everyheadingmarks bottom
3400\everyfootingmarks bottom
3401
3402% @headings double      turns headings on for double-sided printing.
3403% @headings single      turns headings on for single-sided printing.
3404% @headings off         turns them off.
3405% @headings on          same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
3406% @headings after       turns on double-sided headings after this page.
3407% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
3408% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
3409% By default, they are off at the start of a document,
3410% and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
3411
3412\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
3413
3414\def\headingsoff{% non-global headings elimination
3415  \evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}%
3416   \oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}%
3417}
3418
3419\def\HEADINGSoff{{\globaldefs=1 \headingsoff}} % global setting
3420\HEADINGSoff  % it's the default
3421
3422% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
3423% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
3424% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
3425% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
3426% edge of all pages.
3427\def\HEADINGSdouble{%
3428\global\pageno=1
3429\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
3430\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
3431\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
3432\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
3433\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
3434}
3435\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
3436
3437% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
3438% page number on top right.
3439\def\HEADINGSsingle{%
3440\global\pageno=1
3441\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
3442\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
3443\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
3444\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
3445\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
3446}
3447\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
3448
3449\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
3450\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
3451\def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
3452\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
3453\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
3454\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
3455\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
3456\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
3457}
3458
3459\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
3460\def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
3461\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
3462\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
3463\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
3464\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
3465\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
3466}
3467
3468% Subroutines used in generating headings
3469% This produces Day Month Year style of output.
3470% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set
3471% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).
3472\ifx\today\thisisundefined
3473\def\today{%
3474  \number\day\space
3475  \ifcase\month
3476  \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
3477  \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
3478  \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
3479  \fi
3480  \space\number\year}
3481\fi
3482
3483% @settitle line...  specifies the title of the document, for headings.
3484% It generates no output of its own.
3485\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
3486\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}}
3487
3488
3489\message{tables,}
3490% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x).
3491
3492% default indentation of table text
3493\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
3494% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
3495\newdimen\itemindent  \itemindent=.3in
3496% margin between end of table item and start of table text.
3497\newdimen\itemmargin  \itemmargin=.1in
3498
3499% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
3500\newdimen\itemmax
3501
3502% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
3503% these defs.
3504% They also define \itemindex
3505% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
3506
3507\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
3508
3509\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
3510
3511\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
3512\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
3513
3514\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
3515  \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
3516  \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
3517  \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}%
3518  \itemindex{#1}%
3519  \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
3520  %
3521  % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
3522  % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
3523  % line.  We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
3524  % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
3525  % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
3526  \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
3527    %
3528    % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
3529    % but leave it ragged-right.
3530    \begingroup
3531      \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
3532      \advance\hsize by\tableindent
3533      \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil\relax
3534      \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
3535    \endgroup
3536    %
3537    % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
3538    % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
3539    \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
3540    %
3541    % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up.  However, if
3542    % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no
3543    % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would
3544    % cause the example and the item to crash together.  So we use this
3545    % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert
3546    % \parskip glue after all.  Section titles are handled this way also.
3547    %
3548    \penalty 10001
3549    \endgroup
3550    \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
3551  \else
3552    % The item text fits into the space.  Start a paragraph, so that the
3553    % following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
3554    \noindent
3555    % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
3556    % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
3557    % eventually be printed.
3558    \nobreak\kern-\tableindent
3559    \dimen0 = \itemmax  \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
3560    \unhbox0
3561    \nobreak\kern\dimen0
3562    \endgroup
3563    \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
3564  \fi
3565}
3566
3567\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}}
3568\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}}
3569
3570% @table, @ftable, @vtable.
3571\envdef\table{%
3572  \let\itemindex\gobble
3573  \tablecheck{table}%
3574}
3575\envdef\ftable{%
3576  \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}%
3577  \tablecheck{ftable}%
3578}
3579\envdef\vtable{%
3580  \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}%
3581  \tablecheck{vtable}%
3582}
3583\def\tablecheck#1{%
3584  \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active
3585    \endgroup
3586    \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is
3587      that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}%
3588    \def\next{\doignore{#1}}%
3589  \else
3590    \let\next\tablex
3591  \fi
3592  \next
3593}
3594\def\tablex#1{%
3595  \def\itemindicate{#1}%
3596  \parsearg\tabley
3597}
3598\def\tabley#1{%
3599  {%
3600    \makevalueexpandable
3601    \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}%
3602    \expandafter
3603  }\temp \endtablez
3604}
3605\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{%
3606  \aboveenvbreak
3607  \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi
3608  \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi
3609  \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi
3610  \itemmax=\tableindent
3611  \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin
3612  \advance \leftskip by \tableindent
3613  \exdentamount=\tableindent
3614  \parindent = 0pt
3615  \parskip = \smallskipamount
3616  \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
3617  \let\item = \internalBitem
3618  \let\itemx = \internalBitemx
3619}
3620\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak}
3621\let\Eftable\Etable
3622\let\Evtable\Etable
3623\let\Eitemize\Etable
3624\let\Eenumerate\Etable
3625
3626% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
3627
3628\newcount \itemno
3629
3630\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize}
3631
3632\def\doitemize#1{%
3633  \aboveenvbreak
3634  \itemmax=\itemindent
3635  \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin
3636  \advance\leftskip by \itemindent
3637  \exdentamount=\itemindent
3638  \parindent=0pt
3639  \parskip=\smallskipamount
3640  \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
3641  %
3642  % Try typesetting the item mark that if the document erroneously says
3643  % something like @itemize @samp (intending @table), there's an error
3644  % right away at the @itemize.  It's not the best error message in the
3645  % world, but it's better than leaving it to the @item.  This means if
3646  % the user wants an empty mark, they have to say @w{} not just @w.
3647  \def\itemcontents{#1}%
3648  \setbox0 = \hbox{\itemcontents}%
3649  %
3650  % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet.
3651  \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi
3652  %
3653  \let\item=\itemizeitem
3654}
3655
3656% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate.
3657%
3658\def\itemizeitem{%
3659  \advance\itemno by 1  % for enumerations
3660  {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break
3661  {%
3662   % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a
3663   % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have
3664   % done a \vskip-\parskip.  In that case, we don't want to zero
3665   % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading.  On the
3666   % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there
3667   % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much
3668   % space.  In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before.  At least
3669   % that's the theory.
3670   \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi
3671   \noindent
3672   \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}%
3673   %
3674   \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item.
3675  \flushcr
3676}
3677
3678% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
3679% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
3680%
3681\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
3682
3683% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
3684% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list.  No
3685% argument is the same as `1'.
3686%
3687\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1  \endenumeratey}
3688\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
3689  % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
3690  \def\thearg{#1}%
3691  \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
3692  %
3693  % Detect if the argument is a single token.  If so, it might be a
3694  % letter.  Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
3695  % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
3696  % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
3697  % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
3698  \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
3699  \ifx\rest\empty
3700    % Only one token in the argument.  It could still be anything.
3701    % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
3702    % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
3703    %   not equal to itself.
3704    % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
3705    %
3706    % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
3707    % continuing to look for a <number>.
3708    %
3709    \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
3710      \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
3711    \else
3712      % It's a letter.
3713      \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
3714        \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
3715      \else
3716        \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
3717      \fi
3718    \fi
3719  \else
3720    % Multiple tokens in the argument.  We hope it's a number.
3721    \numericenumerate
3722  \fi
3723}
3724
3725% An @enumerate whose labels are integers.  The starting integer is
3726% given in \thearg.
3727%
3728\def\numericenumerate{%
3729  \itemno = \thearg
3730  \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
3731}
3732
3733% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
3734\def\lowercaseenumerate{%
3735  \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
3736  \startenumeration{%
3737    % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
3738    \ifnum\itemno=0
3739      \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
3740                  alphabet}%
3741    \fi
3742    \char\lccode\itemno
3743  }%
3744}
3745
3746% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
3747\def\uppercaseenumerate{%
3748  \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
3749  \startenumeration{%
3750    % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
3751    \ifnum\itemno=0
3752      \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
3753                  alphabet}
3754    \fi
3755    \char\uccode\itemno
3756  }%
3757}
3758
3759% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
3760% common last two arguments.  Also subtract one from the initial value in
3761% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
3762%
3763\def\startenumeration#1{%
3764  \advance\itemno by -1
3765  \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr
3766}
3767
3768% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
3769% to @enumerate.
3770%
3771\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
3772\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
3773\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
3774\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
3775
3776
3777% @multitable macros
3778% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
3779%
3780% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
3781% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble.  Width
3782% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
3783% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
3784
3785% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
3786
3787% To make preamble:
3788%
3789% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
3790%   @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
3791%   @item ...
3792%
3793%   Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
3794%   current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
3795%   columns as desired.
3796
3797
3798% Or use a template:
3799%   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
3800%   @item ...
3801%   using the widest term desired in each column.
3802
3803% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
3804% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
3805% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
3806% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
3807
3808% @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt
3809% if they are.
3810
3811% Sample multitable:
3812
3813%   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
3814%   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
3815%   @item
3816%   first col stuff
3817%   @tab
3818%   second col stuff
3819%   @tab
3820%   third col
3821%   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
3822%   @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
3823%
3824%         They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
3825%   @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
3826%   @end multitable
3827
3828% Default dimensions may be reset by user.
3829% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
3830% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
3831% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
3832% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
3833%                                                            to baseline.
3834%   0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
3835%
3836\newskip\multitableparskip
3837\newskip\multitableparindent
3838\newdimen\multitablecolspace
3839\newskip\multitablelinespace
3840\multitableparskip=0pt
3841\multitableparindent=6pt
3842\multitablecolspace=12pt
3843\multitablelinespace=0pt
3844
3845% Macros used to set up halign preamble:
3846%
3847\let\endsetuptable\relax
3848\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
3849\let\columnfractions\relax
3850\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
3851\newif\ifsetpercent
3852
3853% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might
3854% be just 1.  We just use it, whatever it is.
3855%
3856\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {%
3857  \global\advance\colcount by 1
3858  \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}%
3859  \setuptable
3860}
3861
3862\newcount\colcount
3863\def\setuptable#1{%
3864  \def\firstarg{#1}%
3865  \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
3866    \let\go = \relax
3867  \else
3868    \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
3869      \global\setpercenttrue
3870    \else
3871      \ifsetpercent
3872         \let\go\pickupwholefraction
3873      \else
3874         \global\advance\colcount by 1
3875         \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a
3876                   % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway.
3877         \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
3878      \fi
3879    \fi
3880    \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
3881      % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
3882      % we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
3883      \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
3884    \else
3885      \let\go = \setuptable
3886    \fi%
3887  \fi
3888  \go
3889}
3890
3891% multitable-only commands.
3892%
3893% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold.
3894% Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group
3895% of an alignment entry.  \everycr resets \everytab so we don't have to
3896% undo it ourselves.
3897\def\headitemfont{\b}% for people to use in the template row; not changeable
3898\def\headitem{%
3899  \checkenv\multitable
3900  \crcr
3901  \global\everytab={\bf}% can't use \headitemfont since the parsing differs
3902  \the\everytab % for the first item
3903}%
3904%
3905% A \tab used to include \hskip1sp.  But then the space in a template
3906% line is not enough.  That is bad.  So let's go back to just `&' until
3907% we again encounter the problem the 1sp was intended to solve.
3908%					--karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
3909\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}%
3910
3911% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
3912%
3913\newtoks\everytab  % insert after every tab.
3914%
3915\envdef\multitable{%
3916  \vskip\parskip
3917  \startsavinginserts
3918  %
3919  % @item within a multitable starts a normal row.
3920  % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries
3921  % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka
3922  % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize.
3923  \def\item{\crcr}%
3924  %
3925  \tolerance=9500
3926  \hbadness=9500
3927  \setmultitablespacing
3928  \parskip=\multitableparskip
3929  \parindent=\multitableparindent
3930  \overfullrule=0pt
3931  \global\colcount=0
3932  %
3933  \everycr = {%
3934    \noalign{%
3935      \global\everytab={}%
3936      \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter.
3937      % Check for saved footnotes, etc.
3938      \checkinserts
3939      % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
3940      %\filbreak
3941	% Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the
3942	% table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better?  Wait until the
3943	% problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
3944    }%
3945  }%
3946  %
3947  \parsearg\domultitable
3948}
3949\def\domultitable#1{%
3950  % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
3951  \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
3952  %
3953  % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
3954  % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
3955  % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
3956  % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
3957  \halign\bgroup &%
3958    \global\advance\colcount by 1
3959    \multistrut
3960    \vtop{%
3961      % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width:
3962      \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
3963      %
3964      % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
3965      % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
3966      % the first one.
3967      %
3968      % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
3969      % to the width of each template entry.
3970      %
3971      % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
3972      % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
3973      % will keep entries from bumping into each other.  Table will start at
3974      % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
3975      %
3976      % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
3977      \rightskip=0pt
3978      \ifnum\colcount=1
3979	% The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
3980	\advance\hsize by\leftskip
3981      \else
3982	\ifsetpercent \else
3983	  % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
3984	  % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
3985	  \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
3986	\fi
3987       % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
3988      \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
3989      \fi
3990      % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
3991      % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
3992      % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
3993      % For example:
3994      % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
3995      % @item @code{#}
3996      % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
3997      % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively
3998      % marking characters.
3999      \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut
4000    }\cr
4001}
4002\def\Emultitable{%
4003  \crcr
4004  \egroup % end the \halign
4005  \global\setpercentfalse
4006}
4007
4008\def\setmultitablespacing{%
4009  \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing
4010  %
4011  % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in
4012  % \multitableparskip calculation.  We used define \multistrut based on
4013  % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off.
4014  % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100.
4015\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
4016\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
4017\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
4018\fi
4019% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
4020% table. If not, do nothing.
4021%        If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
4022\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
4023\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
4024\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller
4025                                      % than skip between lines in the table.
4026\fi%
4027\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
4028\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
4029\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller
4030                                      % than skip between lines in the table.
4031\fi}
4032
4033
4034\message{conditionals,}
4035
4036% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext,
4037% @ifnotxml always succeed.  They currently do nothing; we don't
4038% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested.  But we
4039% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't
4040% attempt to close an environment group.
4041%
4042\def\makecond#1{%
4043  \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax
4044  \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1
4045}
4046\makecond{iftex}
4047\makecond{ifnotdocbook}
4048\makecond{ifnothtml}
4049\makecond{ifnotinfo}
4050\makecond{ifnotplaintext}
4051\makecond{ifnotxml}
4052
4053% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like.
4054%
4055\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
4056\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
4057\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}}
4058\def\html{\doignore{html}}
4059\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}}
4060\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
4061\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
4062\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
4063\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
4064\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}}
4065\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
4066\def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
4067\def\xml{\doignore{xml}}
4068
4069% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals.
4070%
4071% A count to remember the depth of nesting.
4072\newcount\doignorecount
4073
4074\def\doignore#1{\begingroup
4075  % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode:
4076  \obeylines
4077  \catcode`\@ = \other
4078  \catcode`\{ = \other
4079  \catcode`\} = \other
4080  %
4081  % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
4082  \spaceisspace
4083  %
4084  % Count number of #1's that we've seen.
4085  \doignorecount = 0
4086  %
4087  % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'.
4088  \dodoignore{#1}%
4089}
4090
4091{ \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source.
4092  \obeylines %
4093  %
4094  \gdef\dodoignore#1{%
4095    % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'.
4096    %
4097    % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'.
4098    \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{%
4099      \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}%
4100    %
4101    % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a
4102    % line.  (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for
4103    % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.)
4104    \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}%
4105    %
4106    % And now expand that command.
4107    \doignoretext ^^M%
4108  }%
4109}
4110
4111\def\doignoreyyy#1{%
4112  \def\temp{#1}%
4113  \ifx\temp\empty			% Nothing found.
4114    \let\next\doignoretextzzz
4115  \else					% Found a nested condition, ...
4116    \advance\doignorecount by 1
4117    \let\next\doignoretextyyy		% ..., look for another.
4118    % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example).
4119  \fi
4120  \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro.
4121}
4122
4123% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_".
4124%
4125\def\doignoretextzzz#1{%
4126  \ifnum\doignorecount = 0	% We have just found the outermost @end.
4127    \let\next\enddoignore
4128  \else				% Still inside a nested condition.
4129    \advance\doignorecount by -1
4130    \let\next\doignoretext      % Look for the next @end.
4131  \fi
4132  \next
4133}
4134
4135% Finish off ignored text.
4136{ \obeylines%
4137  % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim
4138  % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional
4139  % would result in a blank line in the output.
4140  \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
4141}
4142
4143
4144% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
4145% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
4146%
4147% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
4148% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
4149% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
4150% didn't need it.
4151% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10.
4152%
4153\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
4154\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
4155  {%
4156    \makevalueexpandable
4157    \def\temp{#2}%
4158    \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}%
4159    \ifx\temp\empty
4160      \next{}%
4161    \else
4162      \setzzz#2\endsetzzz
4163    \fi
4164  }%
4165}
4166% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
4167\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}}
4168
4169% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
4170%
4171\parseargdef\clear{%
4172  {%
4173    \makevalueexpandable
4174    \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax
4175  }%
4176}
4177
4178% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
4179\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx}
4180\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
4181{
4182  \catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active
4183  %
4184  \gdef\makevalueexpandable{%
4185    \let\value = \expandablevalue
4186    % We don't want these characters active, ...
4187    \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other
4188    % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if
4189    % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though.
4190    % So \let them to their normal equivalents.
4191    \let-\normaldash \let_\normalunderscore
4192  }
4193}
4194
4195% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
4196% properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies).
4197% The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since
4198% the result winds up in the index file.  This means that if the
4199% variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain
4200% it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work
4201% to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
4202%
4203\def\expandablevalue#1{%
4204  \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
4205    {[No value for ``#1'']}%
4206    \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}%
4207  \else
4208    \csname SET#1\endcsname
4209  \fi
4210}
4211
4212% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
4213% with @set.
4214%
4215% To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine.
4216%
4217\makecond{ifset}
4218\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}}
4219\def\doifset#1#2{%
4220  {%
4221    \makevalueexpandable
4222    \let\next=\empty
4223    \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax
4224      #1% If not set, redefine \next.
4225    \fi
4226    \expandafter
4227  }\next
4228}
4229\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}}
4230
4231% @ifclear VAR ... @end executes the `...' iff VAR has never been
4232% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
4233%
4234% The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the
4235% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set,
4236% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail.
4237%
4238\makecond{ifclear}
4239\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}}
4240\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}}
4241
4242% @ifcommandisdefined CMD ... @end executes the `...' if CMD (written
4243% without the @) is in fact defined.  We can only feasibly check at the
4244% TeX level, so something like `mathcode' is going to considered
4245% defined even though it is not a Texinfo command.
4246% 
4247\makecond{ifcommanddefined}
4248\def\ifcommanddefined{\parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\let\next=\ifcmddefinedfail}}}
4249%
4250\def\doifcmddefined#1#2{{%
4251    \makevalueexpandable
4252    \let\next=\empty
4253    \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\relax
4254      #1% If not defined, \let\next as above.
4255    \fi
4256    \expandafter
4257  }\next
4258}
4259\def\ifcmddefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommanddefined}}
4260
4261% @ifcommandnotdefined CMD ... handled similar to @ifclear above.
4262\makecond{ifcommandnotdefined}
4263\def\ifcommandnotdefined{%
4264  \parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\else \let\next=\ifcmdnotdefinedfail}}}
4265\def\ifcmdnotdefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommandnotdefined}}
4266
4267% Set the `txicommandconditionals' variable, so documents have a way to
4268% test if the @ifcommand...defined conditionals are available.
4269\set txicommandconditionals
4270
4271% @dircategory CATEGORY  -- specify a category of the dir file
4272% which this file should belong to.  Ignore this in TeX.
4273\let\dircategory=\comment
4274
4275% @defininfoenclose.
4276\let\definfoenclose=\comment
4277
4278
4279\message{indexing,}
4280% Index generation facilities
4281
4282% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
4283% except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's.
4284\edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}}
4285
4286% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
4287% It automatically defines \fooindex such that
4288% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
4289% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
4290% the file that accumulates this index.  The file's extension is foo.
4291% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
4292% for the sake of vms.
4293%
4294\def\newindex#1{%
4295  \iflinks
4296    \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
4297    \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
4298  \fi
4299  \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%     % Define @#1index
4300    \noexpand\doindex{#1}}
4301}
4302
4303% @defindex foo  ==  \newindex{foo}
4304%
4305\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
4306
4307% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
4308%
4309\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
4310%
4311\def\newcodeindex#1{%
4312  \iflinks
4313    \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
4314    \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
4315  \fi
4316  \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
4317    \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}%
4318}
4319
4320
4321% @synindex foo bar    makes index foo feed into index bar.
4322% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
4323%
4324% @syncodeindex foo bar   similar, but put all entries made for index foo
4325% inside @code.
4326%
4327\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}}
4328\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}}
4329
4330% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo),
4331% #3 the target index (bar).
4332\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{%
4333  % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up
4334  % closing the target index.
4335  \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \relax
4336    % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
4337    % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
4338    \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname
4339    \expandafter\let\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1
4340  \fi
4341  % redefine \fooindfile:
4342  \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname
4343  \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp
4344  % redefine \fooindex:
4345  \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}%
4346}
4347
4348% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
4349% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
4350%  and it is "foo", the name of the index.
4351
4352% \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
4353% This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
4354
4355% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
4356% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
4357
4358\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
4359\def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
4360
4361% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
4362\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
4363\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
4364
4365% Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry.
4366% Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't,
4367% we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't.
4368%
4369\def\indexdummies{%
4370  \escapechar = `\\     % use backslash in output files.
4371  \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files.
4372  \def\ {\realbackslash\space }%
4373  %
4374  % Need these unexpandable (because we define \tt as a dummy)
4375  % definitions when @{ or @} appear in index entry text.  Also, more
4376  % complicated, when \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
4377  % We can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
4378  % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.  Perhaps we
4379  % should define @lbrace and @rbrace commands a la @comma.
4380  \def\{{{\tt\char123}}%
4381  \def\}{{\tt\char125}}%
4382  %
4383  % I don't entirely understand this, but when an index entry is
4384  % generated from a macro call, the \endinput which \scanmacro inserts
4385  % causes processing to be prematurely terminated.  This is,
4386  % apparently, because \indexsorttmp is fully expanded, and \endinput
4387  % is an expandable command.  The redefinition below makes \endinput
4388  % disappear altogether for that purpose -- although logging shows that
4389  % processing continues to some further point.  On the other hand, it
4390  % seems \endinput does not hurt in the printed index arg, since that
4391  % is still getting written without apparent harm.
4392  %
4393  % Sample source (mac-idx3.tex, reported by Graham Percival to
4394  % help-texinfo, 22may06):
4395  % @macro funindex {WORD}
4396  % @findex xyz
4397  % @end macro
4398  % ...
4399  % @funindex commtest
4400  %
4401  % The above is not enough to reproduce the bug, but it gives the flavor.
4402  %
4403  % Sample whatsit resulting:
4404  % .@write3{\entry{xyz}{@folio }{@code {xyz@endinput }}}
4405  %
4406  % So:
4407  \let\endinput = \empty
4408  %
4409  % Do the redefinitions.
4410  \commondummies
4411}
4412
4413% For the aux and toc files, @ is the escape character.  So we want to
4414% redefine everything using @ as the escape character (instead of
4415% \realbackslash, still used for index files).  When everything uses @,
4416% this will be simpler.
4417%
4418\def\atdummies{%
4419  \def\@{@@}%
4420  \def\ {@ }%
4421  \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd
4422  \let\} = \rbraceatcmd
4423  %
4424  % Do the redefinitions.
4425  \commondummies
4426  \otherbackslash
4427}
4428
4429% Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies.
4430%
4431\def\commondummies{%
4432  %
4433  % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively
4434  % preventing its expansion.  This is used only for control words,
4435  % not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for
4436  % control characters, but is needed to separate the control word
4437  % from whatever follows.
4438  %
4439  % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the
4440  % space.
4441  %
4442  % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and
4443  % those that do not.  If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then
4444  % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever).
4445  %
4446  \def\definedummyword  ##1{\def##1{\string##1\space}}%
4447  \def\definedummyletter##1{\def##1{\string##1}}%
4448  \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter
4449  %
4450  \commondummiesnofonts
4451  %
4452  \definedummyletter\_%
4453  \definedummyletter\-%
4454  %
4455  % Non-English letters.
4456  \definedummyword\AA
4457  \definedummyword\AE
4458  \definedummyword\DH
4459  \definedummyword\L
4460  \definedummyword\O
4461  \definedummyword\OE
4462  \definedummyword\TH
4463  \definedummyword\aa
4464  \definedummyword\ae
4465  \definedummyword\dh
4466  \definedummyword\exclamdown
4467  \definedummyword\l
4468  \definedummyword\o
4469  \definedummyword\oe
4470  \definedummyword\ordf
4471  \definedummyword\ordm
4472  \definedummyword\questiondown
4473  \definedummyword\ss
4474  \definedummyword\th
4475  %
4476  % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
4477  \definedummyword\bf
4478  \definedummyword\gtr
4479  \definedummyword\hat
4480  \definedummyword\less
4481  \definedummyword\sf
4482  \definedummyword\sl
4483  \definedummyword\tclose
4484  \definedummyword\tt
4485  %
4486  \definedummyword\LaTeX
4487  \definedummyword\TeX
4488  %
4489  % Assorted special characters.
4490  \definedummyword\arrow
4491  \definedummyword\bullet
4492  \definedummyword\comma
4493  \definedummyword\copyright
4494  \definedummyword\registeredsymbol
4495  \definedummyword\dots
4496  \definedummyword\enddots
4497  \definedummyword\entrybreak
4498  \definedummyword\equiv
4499  \definedummyword\error
4500  \definedummyword\euro
4501  \definedummyword\expansion
4502  \definedummyword\geq
4503  \definedummyword\guillemetleft
4504  \definedummyword\guillemetright
4505  \definedummyword\guilsinglleft
4506  \definedummyword\guilsinglright
4507  \definedummyword\lbracechar
4508  \definedummyword\leq
4509  \definedummyword\minus
4510  \definedummyword\ogonek
4511  \definedummyword\pounds
4512  \definedummyword\point
4513  \definedummyword\print
4514  \definedummyword\quotedblbase
4515  \definedummyword\quotedblleft
4516  \definedummyword\quotedblright
4517  \definedummyword\quoteleft
4518  \definedummyword\quoteright
4519  \definedummyword\quotesinglbase
4520  \definedummyword\rbracechar
4521  \definedummyword\result
4522  \definedummyword\textdegree
4523  %
4524  % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write.
4525  \macrolist
4526  %
4527  \normalturnoffactive
4528  %
4529  % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any
4530  % (non-fully-expandable) commands.
4531  \makevalueexpandable
4532}
4533
4534% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts.
4535%
4536\def\commondummiesnofonts{%
4537  % Control letters and accents.
4538  \definedummyletter\!%
4539  \definedummyaccent\"%
4540  \definedummyaccent\'%
4541  \definedummyletter\*%
4542  \definedummyaccent\,%
4543  \definedummyletter\.%
4544  \definedummyletter\/%
4545  \definedummyletter\:%
4546  \definedummyaccent\=%
4547  \definedummyletter\?%
4548  \definedummyaccent\^%
4549  \definedummyaccent\`%
4550  \definedummyaccent\~%
4551  \definedummyword\u
4552  \definedummyword\v
4553  \definedummyword\H
4554  \definedummyword\dotaccent
4555  \definedummyword\ogonek
4556  \definedummyword\ringaccent
4557  \definedummyword\tieaccent
4558  \definedummyword\ubaraccent
4559  \definedummyword\udotaccent
4560  \definedummyword\dotless
4561  %
4562  % Texinfo font commands.
4563  \definedummyword\b
4564  \definedummyword\i
4565  \definedummyword\r
4566  \definedummyword\sansserif
4567  \definedummyword\sc
4568  \definedummyword\slanted
4569  \definedummyword\t
4570  %
4571  % Commands that take arguments.
4572  \definedummyword\abbr
4573  \definedummyword\acronym
4574  \definedummyword\anchor
4575  \definedummyword\cite
4576  \definedummyword\code
4577  \definedummyword\command
4578  \definedummyword\dfn
4579  \definedummyword\dmn
4580  \definedummyword\email
4581  \definedummyword\emph
4582  \definedummyword\env
4583  \definedummyword\file
4584  \definedummyword\image
4585  \definedummyword\indicateurl
4586  \definedummyword\inforef
4587  \definedummyword\kbd
4588  \definedummyword\key
4589  \definedummyword\math
4590  \definedummyword\option
4591  \definedummyword\pxref
4592  \definedummyword\ref
4593  \definedummyword\samp
4594  \definedummyword\strong
4595  \definedummyword\tie
4596  \definedummyword\uref
4597  \definedummyword\url
4598  \definedummyword\var
4599  \definedummyword\verb
4600  \definedummyword\w
4601  \definedummyword\xref
4602}
4603
4604% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index
4605% by, and when constructing control sequence names.  It eliminates all
4606% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string
4607% would be for a given command (usually its argument).
4608%
4609\def\indexnofonts{%
4610  % Accent commands should become @asis.
4611  \def\definedummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}%
4612  % We can just ignore other control letters.
4613  \def\definedummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}%
4614  % All control words become @asis by default; overrides below.
4615  \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent
4616  %
4617  \commondummiesnofonts
4618  %
4619  % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
4620  % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
4621  % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
4622  %\let\tt=\asis
4623  %
4624  \def\ { }%
4625  \def\@{@}%
4626  \def\_{\normalunderscore}%
4627  \def\-{}% @- shouldn't affect sorting
4628  %
4629  % Unfortunately, texindex is not prepared to handle braces in the
4630  % content at all.  So for index sorting, we map @{ and @} to strings
4631  % starting with |, since that ASCII character is between ASCII { and }.
4632  \def\{{|a}%
4633  \def\lbracechar{|a}%
4634  %
4635  \def\}{|b}%
4636  \def\rbracechar{|b}%
4637  %
4638  % Non-English letters.
4639  \def\AA{AA}%
4640  \def\AE{AE}%
4641  \def\DH{DZZ}%
4642  \def\L{L}%
4643  \def\OE{OE}%
4644  \def\O{O}%
4645  \def\TH{ZZZ}%
4646  \def\aa{aa}%
4647  \def\ae{ae}%
4648  \def\dh{dzz}%
4649  \def\exclamdown{!}%
4650  \def\l{l}%
4651  \def\oe{oe}%
4652  \def\ordf{a}%
4653  \def\ordm{o}%
4654  \def\o{o}%
4655  \def\questiondown{?}%
4656  \def\ss{ss}%
4657  \def\th{zzz}%
4658  %
4659  \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}%
4660  \def\TeX{TeX}%
4661  %
4662  % Assorted special characters.
4663  % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.)
4664  \def\arrow{->}%
4665  \def\bullet{bullet}%
4666  \def\comma{,}%
4667  \def\copyright{copyright}%
4668  \def\dots{...}%
4669  \def\enddots{...}%
4670  \def\equiv{==}%
4671  \def\error{error}%
4672  \def\euro{euro}%
4673  \def\expansion{==>}%
4674  \def\geq{>=}%
4675  \def\guillemetleft{<<}%
4676  \def\guillemetright{>>}%
4677  \def\guilsinglleft{<}%
4678  \def\guilsinglright{>}%
4679  \def\leq{<=}%
4680  \def\minus{-}%
4681  \def\point{.}%
4682  \def\pounds{pounds}%
4683  \def\print{-|}%
4684  \def\quotedblbase{"}%
4685  \def\quotedblleft{"}%
4686  \def\quotedblright{"}%
4687  \def\quoteleft{`}%
4688  \def\quoteright{'}%
4689  \def\quotesinglbase{,}%
4690  \def\registeredsymbol{R}%
4691  \def\result{=>}%
4692  \def\textdegree{o}%
4693  %
4694  \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlquoteignore\endcsname\relax
4695  \else \indexlquoteignore \fi
4696  %
4697  % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present).
4698  % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now.
4699  % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up
4700  % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry
4701  % that starts with \.
4702  %
4703  % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them
4704  % to take a single TeX argument.  The case of a macro invocation that
4705  % goes to end-of-line is not handled.
4706  %
4707  \macrolist
4708}
4709
4710% Undocumented (for FSFS 2nd ed.): @set txiindexlquoteignore makes us
4711% ignore left quotes in the sort term.
4712{\catcode`\`=\active
4713 \gdef\indexlquoteignore{\let`=\empty}}
4714
4715\let\indexbackslash=0  %overridden during \printindex.
4716\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
4717
4718% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
4719% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text.
4720\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}}
4721
4722% Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
4723% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
4724% empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception
4725% is with most defuns, which call us directly).
4726%
4727\def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
4728  \iflinks
4729  {%
4730    % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg).
4731    \toks0 = {#2}%
4732    % If third arg is present, precede it with a space.
4733    \def\thirdarg{#3}%
4734    \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else
4735      \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%
4736    \fi
4737    %
4738    \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}%
4739    %
4740    \safewhatsit\dosubindwrite
4741  }%
4742  \fi
4743}
4744
4745% Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file:
4746%
4747\def\dosubindwrite{%
4748  % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
4749  \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
4750    \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}%
4751  \fi
4752  %
4753  % Remember, we are within a group.
4754  \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
4755  \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
4756      % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
4757  %
4758  % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to
4759  % get the string to sort by.
4760  {\indexnofonts
4761   \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion
4762   \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}%
4763  }%
4764  %
4765  % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
4766  % the original text, including any font commands.  We write
4767  % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
4768  % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
4769  % sorted result.
4770  \edef\temp{%
4771    \write\writeto{%
4772      \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
4773  }%
4774  \temp
4775}
4776
4777% Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit:
4778%
4779% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
4780% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
4781% the skip again.  Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
4782% \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero.  The result is that
4783% sequences like this:
4784% @end defun
4785% @tindex whatever
4786% @defun ...
4787% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
4788% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
4789% the previous defun.
4790%
4791% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode.  We
4792% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
4793%
4794% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
4795%
4796% But wait, there is a catch there:
4797% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip.  \ifdim is not
4798% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts
4799% of the skip.  The only way seems to be to check the textual
4800% representation of the skip.
4801%
4802% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that
4803% the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter).
4804%
4805\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname}
4806%
4807\newskip\whatsitskip
4808\newcount\whatsitpenalty
4809%
4810% ..., ready, GO:
4811%
4812\def\safewhatsit#1{\ifhmode
4813  #1%
4814 \else
4815  % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously.
4816  \whatsitskip = \lastskip
4817  \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}%
4818  \whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty
4819  %
4820  % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a
4821  % skip.  And since a skip is discardable, that means this
4822  % -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a
4823  % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential
4824  % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed.
4825  \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
4826  \else
4827    \vskip-\whatsitskip
4828  \fi
4829  %
4830  #1%
4831  %
4832  \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
4833    % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and
4834    % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak.  In that case, we want
4835    % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various
4836    % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any
4837    % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint.  For example:
4838    %   @deffn deffn-whatever
4839    %   @vindex index-whatever
4840    %   Description.
4841    % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit
4842    % and the "Description." paragraph.
4843    \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi
4844  \else
4845    % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip,
4846    % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item
4847    % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak.
4848    \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip
4849  \fi
4850\fi}
4851
4852% The index entry written in the file actually looks like
4853%  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
4854% or
4855%  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
4856% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
4857% containing these kinds of lines:
4858%  \initial {c}
4859%     before the first topic whose initial is c
4860%  \entry {topic}{pagelist}
4861%     for a topic that is used without subtopics
4862%  \primary {topic}
4863%     for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
4864%  \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
4865%     for each subtopic.
4866
4867% Define the user-accessible indexing commands
4868% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
4869
4870\def\findex {\fnindex}
4871\def\kindex {\kyindex}
4872\def\cindex {\cpindex}
4873\def\vindex {\vrindex}
4874\def\tindex {\tpindex}
4875\def\pindex {\pgindex}
4876
4877\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
4878{\obeylines %
4879\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
4880\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
4881
4882% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
4883
4884% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
4885% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
4886%
4887\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup
4888  \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
4889  %
4890  \smallfonts \rm
4891  \tolerance = 9500
4892  \plainfrenchspacing
4893  \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression.
4894  %
4895  % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
4896  % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
4897  % \initial {@}
4898  % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
4899  % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
4900  \catcode`\@ = 11
4901  \openin 1 \jobname.#1s
4902  \ifeof 1
4903    % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
4904    % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
4905    % index.  The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
4906    % there is some text.
4907    \putwordIndexNonexistent
4908  \else
4909    %
4910    % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
4911    % false.  We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
4912    % it can discover if there is anything in it.
4913    \read 1 to \temp
4914    \ifeof 1
4915      \putwordIndexIsEmpty
4916    \else
4917      % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
4918      % character.  It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
4919      % to make right now.
4920      \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}%
4921      \catcode`\\ = 0
4922      \escapechar = `\\
4923      \begindoublecolumns
4924      \input \jobname.#1s
4925      \enddoublecolumns
4926    \fi
4927  \fi
4928  \closein 1
4929\endgroup}
4930
4931% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
4932% Change them to control the appearance of the index.
4933
4934\def\initial#1{{%
4935  % Some minor font changes for the special characters.
4936  \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
4937  %
4938  % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
4939  \removelastskip
4940  %
4941  % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
4942  \nobreak
4943  \vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip
4944  \penalty 0
4945  \vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip
4946  %
4947  % Typeset the initial.  Making this add up to a whole number of
4948  % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
4949  % to column.  It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
4950  % we need before each entry, but it's better.
4951  %
4952  % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
4953  \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
4954  \leftline{\secbf #1}%
4955  % Do our best not to break after the initial.
4956  \nobreak
4957  \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
4958}}
4959
4960% \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and
4961% then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin.  It is used for index
4962% and table of contents entries.  The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
4963%
4964% A straightforward implementation would start like this:
4965%	\def\entry#1#2{...
4966% But this freezes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to
4967% @code, which sets - active.  This problem was fixed by a kludge---
4968% ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right.
4969% The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text.
4970%                                 --kasal, 21nov03
4971\def\entry{%
4972  \begingroup
4973    %
4974    % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
4975    % affect previous text.
4976    \par
4977    %
4978    % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
4979    \parfillskip = 0in
4980    %
4981    % No extra space above this paragraph.
4982    \parskip = 0in
4983    %
4984    % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
4985    \finalhyphendemerits = 0
4986    %
4987    % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
4988    % don't both fit on one line.  In that case, bob suggests starting the
4989    % dots pretty far over on the line.  Unfortunately, a large
4990    % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
4991    % lines.  So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
4992    %
4993    % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
4994    % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
4995    \hangindent = 2em
4996    %
4997    % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
4998    % with blank space.
4999    \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
5000    %
5001    % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing
5002    % columns.
5003    \vskip 0pt plus1pt
5004    %
5005    % When reading the text of entry, convert explicit line breaks
5006    % from @* into spaces.  The user might give these in long section
5007    % titles, for instance.
5008    \def\*{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}%
5009    \def\entrybreak{\hfil\break}%
5010    %
5011    % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter):
5012    \afterassignment\doentry
5013    \let\temp =
5014}
5015\def\entrybreak{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}%
5016\def\doentry{%
5017    \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace.
5018      \noindent
5019      \aftergroup\finishentry
5020      % And now comes the text of the entry.
5021}
5022\def\finishentry#1{%
5023    % #1 is the page number.
5024    %
5025    % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
5026    % there are no page numbers.  The next person who breaks this will be
5027    % cursed by a Unix daemon.
5028    \setbox\boxA = \hbox{#1}%
5029    \ifdim\wd\boxA = 0pt
5030      \ %
5031    \else
5032      %
5033      % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
5034      % this line with blank space.  (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
5035      % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
5036      \hfil\penalty50
5037      \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
5038      %
5039      % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
5040      % part of (the primitive) \par.  Without it, a spurious underfull
5041      % \hbox ensues.
5042      \ifpdf
5043	\pdfgettoks#1.%
5044	\ \the\toksA
5045      \else
5046	\ #1%
5047      \fi
5048    \fi
5049    \par
5050  \endgroup
5051}
5052
5053% Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em.
5054\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
5055  \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
5056
5057\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
5058
5059\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
5060\def\secondary#1#2{{%
5061  \parfillskip=0in
5062  \parskip=0in
5063  \hangindent=1in
5064  \hangafter=1
5065  \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill
5066  \ifpdf
5067    \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
5068  \else
5069    #2
5070  \fi
5071  \par
5072}}
5073
5074% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
5075% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
5076% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
5077\catcode`\@=11
5078
5079\newbox\partialpage
5080\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
5081
5082\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
5083  % Grab any single-column material above us.
5084  \output = {%
5085    %
5086    % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
5087    % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
5088    % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
5089    % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off).  In
5090    % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal
5091    % output routine.  Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this
5092    % runs and this will be a no-op.  See the indexspread.tex test case.
5093    \ifvoid\partialpage \else
5094      \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}%
5095    \fi
5096    %
5097    \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
5098      % Unvbox the main output page.
5099      \unvbox\PAGE
5100      \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
5101    }%
5102  }%
5103  \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
5104  %
5105  % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
5106  \output = {\doublecolumnout}%
5107  %
5108  % Change the page size parameters.  We could do this once outside this
5109  % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
5110  % format, but then we repeat the same computation.  Repeating a couple
5111  % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
5112  % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
5113  %
5114  % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
5115  % the columns.  We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
5116  % changes automatically with the paper format.  The magic constant
5117  % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
5118  % as it did when we hard-coded it.
5119  %
5120  % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
5121  % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
5122  % been clobbered.
5123  %
5124  \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
5125    \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
5126    \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
5127  \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
5128  %
5129  % Double the \vsize as well.  (We don't need a separate register here,
5130  % since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
5131  \vsize = 2\vsize
5132}
5133
5134% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
5135% the last.
5136%
5137\def\doublecolumnout{%
5138  \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
5139  % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
5140  % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
5141  % previous page.
5142  \dimen@ = \vsize
5143  \divide\dimen@ by 2
5144  \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage
5145  %
5146  % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
5147  \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
5148  \onepageout\pagesofar
5149  \unvbox255
5150  \penalty\outputpenalty
5151}
5152%
5153% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
5154% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
5155\def\pagesofar{%
5156  \unvbox\partialpage
5157  %
5158  \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
5159  \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
5160  \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
5161}
5162%
5163% All done with double columns.
5164\def\enddoublecolumns{%
5165  % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised
5166  % _before_ we change the output routine.  This is necessary in the
5167  % following situation:
5168  %
5169  % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry.
5170  % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no
5171  % break occurs before the last section starts.  However, the last
5172  % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not
5173  % fit on the page and has to be broken off.  Without the following
5174  % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject
5175  % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output
5176  % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last
5177  % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which
5178  % is wrong:  The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with
5179  % the broken-off section in the recent contributions.  As soon as
5180  % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page
5181  % break.  The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the
5182  % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page
5183  % goal.  When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final
5184  % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after
5185  % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns
5186  % and the final section into the vbox of \pageheight (see
5187  % \pagebody), causing an overfull box.
5188  %
5189  % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the
5190  % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281).
5191  \penalty0
5192  %
5193  \output = {%
5194    % Split the last of the double-column material.  Leave it on the
5195    % current page, no automatic page break.
5196    \balancecolumns
5197    %
5198    % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
5199    % though, there will be another page break right after this \output
5200    % invocation ends.  Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
5201    % want to call it again.  Therefore, reset \output to its normal
5202    % definition right away.  (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
5203    % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
5204    % the output somewhat more palatable.)
5205    \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
5206  }%
5207  \eject
5208  \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
5209  %
5210  % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
5211  % the current page.  We're now back to normal single-column
5212  % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the
5213  % \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
5214  \pagegoal = \vsize
5215}
5216%
5217% Called at the end of the double column material.
5218\def\balancecolumns{%
5219  \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
5220  \dimen@ = \ht0
5221  \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
5222  \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
5223  \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
5224  %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
5225  \splittopskip = \topskip
5226  % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
5227  {%
5228    \vbadness = 10000
5229    \loop
5230      \global\setbox3 = \copy0
5231      \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
5232    \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
5233      \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
5234    \repeat
5235  }%
5236  %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
5237  \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
5238  \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
5239  %
5240  \pagesofar
5241}
5242\catcode`\@ = \other
5243
5244
5245\message{sectioning,}
5246% Chapters, sections, etc.
5247
5248% Let's start with @part.
5249\outer\parseargdef\part{\partzzz{#1}}
5250\def\partzzz#1{%
5251  \chapoddpage
5252  \null
5253  \vskip.3\vsize  % move it down on the page a bit
5254  \begingroup
5255    \noindent \titlefonts\rmisbold #1\par % the text
5256    \let\lastnode=\empty      % no node to associate with
5257    \writetocentry{part}{#1}{}% but put it in the toc
5258    \headingsoff              % no headline or footline on the part page
5259    \chapoddpage
5260  \endgroup
5261}
5262
5263% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron.  But we count the unnumbered
5264% sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf
5265% outlines by their "section number".  We avoid collisions with chapter
5266% numbers by starting them at 10000.  (If a document ever has 10000
5267% chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.)
5268\newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000
5269\newcount\chapno
5270\newcount\secno        \secno=0
5271\newcount\subsecno     \subsecno=0
5272\newcount\subsubsecno  \subsubsecno=0
5273
5274% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
5275\newcount\appendixno  \appendixno = `\@
5276%
5277% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
5278% We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple
5279% construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
5280% letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
5281%
5282\def\appendixletter{%
5283  \ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
5284  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
5285  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
5286  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
5287  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
5288  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
5289  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
5290  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
5291  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
5292  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
5293  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
5294  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
5295  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
5296  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
5297  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
5298  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
5299  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
5300  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
5301  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
5302  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
5303  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
5304  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
5305  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
5306  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
5307  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
5308  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
5309  % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
5310  % expanded while writing the .toc file.  \char\appendixno is not
5311  % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
5312  % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
5313  \else\char\the\appendixno
5314  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
5315  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
5316
5317% Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number
5318% and name of the chapter.  Page headings and footings can use
5319% these.  @section does likewise.
5320\def\thischapter{}
5321\def\thischapternum{}
5322\def\thischaptername{}
5323\def\thissection{}
5324\def\thissectionnum{}
5325\def\thissectionname{}
5326
5327\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
5328\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count
5329
5330% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
5331\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
5332\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
5333
5334% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
5335\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
5336\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
5337
5338% we only have subsub.
5339\chardef\maxseclevel = 3
5340%
5341% A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too.
5342% To achieve this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in:
5343\chardef\unnlevel = \maxseclevel
5344%
5345% Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not:
5346% \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored.
5347\def\chapheadtype{N}
5348
5349% Choose a heading macro
5350% #1 is heading type
5351% #2 is heading level
5352% #3 is text for heading
5353\def\genhead#1#2#3{%
5354  % Compute the abs. sec. level:
5355  \absseclevel=#2
5356  \advance\absseclevel by \secbase
5357  % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range:
5358  \ifnum \absseclevel < 0
5359    \absseclevel = 0
5360  \else
5361    \ifnum \absseclevel > 3
5362      \absseclevel = 3
5363    \fi
5364  \fi
5365  % The heading type:
5366  \def\headtype{#1}%
5367  \if \headtype U%
5368    \ifnum \absseclevel < \unnlevel
5369      \chardef\unnlevel = \absseclevel
5370    \fi
5371  \else
5372    % Check for appendix sections:
5373    \ifnum \absseclevel = 0
5374      \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}%
5375    \else
5376      \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N%
5377	\errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}%
5378      \fi\fi
5379    \fi
5380    % Check for numbered within unnumbered:
5381    \ifnum \absseclevel > \unnlevel
5382      \def\headtype{U}%
5383    \else
5384      \chardef\unnlevel = 3
5385    \fi
5386  \fi
5387  % Now print the heading:
5388  \if \headtype U%
5389    \ifcase\absseclevel
5390	\unnumberedzzz{#3}%
5391    \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}%
5392    \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}%
5393    \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
5394    \fi
5395  \else
5396    \if \headtype A%
5397      \ifcase\absseclevel
5398	  \appendixzzz{#3}%
5399      \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}%
5400      \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}%
5401      \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}%
5402      \fi
5403    \else
5404      \ifcase\absseclevel
5405	  \chapterzzz{#3}%
5406      \or \seczzz{#3}%
5407      \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}%
5408      \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
5409      \fi
5410    \fi
5411  \fi
5412  \suppressfirstparagraphindent
5413}
5414
5415% an interface:
5416\def\numhead{\genhead N}
5417\def\apphead{\genhead A}
5418\def\unnmhead{\genhead U}
5419
5420% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered.  Increment top-level counter, reset
5421% all lower-level sectioning counters to zero.
5422%
5423% Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers
5424% (e.g., figures), q.v.  By default (before any chapter), that is empty.
5425\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
5426%
5427\outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
5428\def\chapterzzz#1{%
5429  % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such
5430  % as an @include file.
5431  \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
5432    \global\advance\chapno by 1
5433  %
5434  % Used for \float.
5435  \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}%
5436  \resetallfloatnos
5437  %
5438  % \putwordChapter can contain complex things in translations.
5439  \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordChapter}%
5440  \message{\the\toks0 \space \the\chapno}%
5441  %
5442  % Write the actual heading.
5443  \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}%
5444  %
5445  % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter.
5446  \global\let\section = \numberedsec
5447  \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
5448  \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
5449}
5450
5451\outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally calls appendixzzz
5452%
5453\def\appendixzzz#1{%
5454  \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
5455    \global\advance\appendixno by 1
5456  \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}%
5457  \resetallfloatnos
5458  %
5459  % \putwordAppendix can contain complex things in translations.
5460  \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordAppendix}%
5461  \message{\the\toks0 \space \appendixletter}%
5462  %
5463  \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}%
5464  %
5465  \global\let\section = \appendixsec
5466  \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
5467  \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
5468}
5469
5470% normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz:
5471\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}}
5472\def\unnumberedzzz#1{%
5473  \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
5474    \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1
5475  %
5476  % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures.
5477  \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
5478  \resetallfloatnos
5479  %
5480  % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
5481  % argument to \message.  Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
5482  % expanded them.  For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
5483  % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
5484  % to be executed, not expanded).
5485  %
5486  % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
5487  % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself.  We use
5488  % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
5489  % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>.  (We also do this for
5490  % the toc entries.)
5491  \toks0 = {#1}%
5492  \message{(\the\toks0)}%
5493  %
5494  \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}%
5495  %
5496  \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
5497  \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
5498  \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
5499}
5500
5501% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
5502\outer\parseargdef\centerchap{%
5503  % Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break
5504  % an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level.
5505  % Thus we are safer this way:		--kasal, 24feb04
5506  \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters
5507  \unnmhead0{#1}%
5508  \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
5509}
5510
5511% @top is like @unnumbered.
5512\let\top\unnumbered
5513
5514% Sections.
5515% 
5516\outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
5517\def\seczzz#1{%
5518  \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
5519  \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}%
5520}
5521
5522% normally calls appendixsectionzzz:
5523\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}}
5524\def\appendixsectionzzz#1{%
5525  \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
5526  \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}%
5527}
5528\let\appendixsec\appendixsection
5529
5530% normally calls unnumberedseczzz:
5531\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}}
5532\def\unnumberedseczzz#1{%
5533  \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
5534  \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}%
5535}
5536
5537% Subsections.
5538% 
5539% normally calls numberedsubseczzz:
5540\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}}
5541\def\numberedsubseczzz#1{%
5542  \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
5543  \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
5544}
5545
5546% normally calls appendixsubseczzz:
5547\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}}
5548\def\appendixsubseczzz#1{%
5549  \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
5550  \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}%
5551                 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
5552}
5553
5554% normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz:
5555\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}}
5556\def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{%
5557  \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
5558  \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}%
5559                 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
5560}
5561
5562% Subsubsections.
5563% 
5564% normally numberedsubsubseczzz:
5565\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}}
5566\def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
5567  \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
5568  \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}%
5569                 {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
5570}
5571
5572% normally appendixsubsubseczzz:
5573\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}}
5574\def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{%
5575  \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
5576  \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}%
5577                 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
5578}
5579
5580% normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz:
5581\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}}
5582\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
5583  \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
5584  \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}%
5585                 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
5586}
5587
5588% These macros control what the section commands do, according
5589% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
5590% Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
5591\let\section = \numberedsec
5592\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
5593\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
5594
5595% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
5596
5597\def\majorheading{%
5598  {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
5599  \parsearg\chapheadingzzz
5600}
5601
5602\def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
5603\def\chapheadingzzz#1{%
5604  \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}%
5605  \nobreak\bigskip \nobreak
5606  \suppressfirstparagraphindent
5607}
5608
5609% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
5610\parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
5611  \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
5612\parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
5613  \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
5614\parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
5615  \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
5616
5617% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
5618% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
5619% given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
5620
5621% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
5622\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
5623
5624% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
5625\newskip\chapheadingskip
5626
5627% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it.
5628\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
5629\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
5630% Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will
5631% get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong.  But we don't
5632% care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page.
5633\def\chapoddpage{%
5634  \chappager
5635  \ifodd\pageno \else
5636    \begingroup
5637      \headingsoff
5638      \null
5639      \chappager
5640    \endgroup
5641  \fi
5642}
5643
5644\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
5645
5646\def\CHAPPAGoff{%
5647\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
5648\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
5649\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
5650
5651\def\CHAPPAGon{%
5652\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
5653\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
5654\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
5655\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
5656
5657\def\CHAPPAGodd{%
5658\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
5659\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
5660\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
5661\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
5662
5663\CHAPPAGon
5664
5665% Chapter opening.
5666%
5667% #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing,
5668% Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number.
5669%
5670% To test against our argument.
5671\def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing}
5672\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc}
5673\def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix}
5674%
5675\def\chapmacro#1#2#3{%
5676  % Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
5677  \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs
5678  \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
5679  \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
5680                        \gdef\thissection{}}%
5681  %
5682  \def\temptype{#2}%
5683  \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
5684    \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
5685                          \gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}%
5686  \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
5687    \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
5688                          \gdef\thischapter{}}%
5689  \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
5690    \toks0={#1}%
5691    \xdef\lastchapterdefs{%
5692      \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
5693      \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}%
5694      % \noexpand\putwordAppendix avoids expanding indigestible
5695      % commands in some of the translations.
5696      \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordAppendix{}
5697                                 \noexpand\thischapternum:
5698                                 \noexpand\thischaptername}%
5699    }%
5700  \else
5701    \toks0={#1}%
5702    \xdef\lastchapterdefs{%
5703      \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
5704      \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}%
5705      % \noexpand\putwordChapter avoids expanding indigestible
5706      % commands in some of the translations.
5707      \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordChapter{}
5708                                 \noexpand\thischapternum:
5709                                 \noexpand\thischaptername}%
5710    }%
5711  \fi\fi\fi
5712  %
5713  % Output the mark.  Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
5714  % the preceding space.
5715  \safewhatsit\domark
5716  %
5717  % Insert the chapter heading break.
5718  \pchapsepmacro
5719  %
5720  % Now the second mark, after the heading break.  No break points
5721  % between here and the heading.
5722  \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs
5723  \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
5724  \domark
5725  %
5726  {%
5727    \chapfonts \rmisbold
5728    %
5729    % Have to define \lastsection before calling \donoderef, because the
5730    % xref code eventually uses it.  On the other hand, it has to be called
5731    % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon.
5732    \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
5733    %
5734    % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix
5735    % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''.
5736    \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
5737      \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
5738      \def\toctype{unnchap}%
5739    \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
5740      \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry
5741      \def\toctype{omit}%
5742    \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
5743      \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}%
5744      \def\toctype{app}%
5745    \else
5746      \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}%
5747      \def\toctype{numchap}%
5748    \fi\fi\fi
5749    %
5750    % Write the toc entry for this chapter.  Must come before the
5751    % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc
5752    % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty.
5753    \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}%
5754    %
5755    % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make
5756    % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has
5757    % been typeset.  If the destination for the pdf outline is after the
5758    % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not
5759    % being visible, for instance under high magnification.
5760    \donoderef{#2}%
5761    %
5762    % Typeset the actual heading.
5763    \nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue.
5764    \vbox{\raggedtitlesettings \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
5765          \unhbox0 #1\par}%
5766  }%
5767  \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
5768  \nobreak
5769}
5770
5771% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
5772\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
5773\def\centerparameters{%
5774  \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
5775  \leftskip = \rightskip
5776  \parfillskip = 0pt
5777}
5778
5779
5780% I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not
5781% updating it with the new noderef stuff.  We'll see.  --karl, 11aug03.
5782%
5783\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
5784%
5785\def\unnchfopen #1{%
5786  \chapoddpage
5787  \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}%
5788  \nobreak\bigskip\nobreak
5789}
5790\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
5791\vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
5792\par\penalty 5000 %
5793}
5794\def\centerchfopen #1{%
5795  \chapoddpage
5796  \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings \hfill #1\hfill}%
5797  \nobreak\bigskip \nobreak
5798}
5799\def\CHAPFopen{%
5800  \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
5801  \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
5802
5803
5804% Section titles.  These macros combine the section number parts and
5805% call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing.
5806%
5807\newskip\secheadingskip
5808\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}}
5809
5810% Subsection titles.
5811\newskip\subsecheadingskip
5812\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}}
5813
5814% Subsubsection titles.
5815\def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip}
5816\def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak}
5817
5818
5819% Print any size, any type, section title.
5820%
5821% #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is
5822% the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the
5823% section number.
5824%
5825\def\seckeyword{sec}
5826%
5827\def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{%
5828  {%
5829    \checkenv{}% should not be in an environment.
5830    %
5831    % Switch to the right set of fonts.
5832    \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rmisbold
5833    %
5834    \def\sectionlevel{#2}%
5835    \def\temptype{#3}%
5836    %
5837    % Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
5838    \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
5839    \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
5840      \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
5841        \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
5842                              \gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}%
5843      \fi
5844    \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
5845      % Don't redefine \thissection.
5846    \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
5847      \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
5848        \toks0={#1}%
5849        \xdef\lastsectiondefs{%
5850          \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
5851          \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
5852          % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible
5853          % commands in some of the translations.
5854          \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{}
5855                                     \noexpand\thissectionnum:
5856                                     \noexpand\thissectionname}%
5857        }%
5858      \fi
5859    \else
5860      \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
5861        \toks0={#1}%
5862        \xdef\lastsectiondefs{%
5863          \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
5864          \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
5865          % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible
5866          % commands in some of the translations.
5867          \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{}
5868                                     \noexpand\thissectionnum:
5869                                     \noexpand\thissectionname}%
5870        }%
5871      \fi
5872    \fi\fi\fi
5873    %
5874    % Go into vertical mode.  Usually we'll already be there, but we
5875    % don't want the following whatsit to end up in a preceding paragraph
5876    % if the document didn't happen to have a blank line.
5877    \par
5878    %
5879    % Output the mark.  Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
5880    % the preceding space.
5881    \safewhatsit\domark
5882    %
5883    % Insert space above the heading.
5884    \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname
5885    %
5886    % Now the second mark, after the heading break.  No break points
5887    % between here and the heading.
5888    \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
5889    \domark
5890    %
5891    % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number.
5892    \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
5893      \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
5894      \def\toctype{unn}%
5895      \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
5896    \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
5897      % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc,
5898      % and don't redefine \lastsection.
5899      \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
5900      \def\toctype{omit}%
5901      \let\sectionlevel=\empty
5902    \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
5903      \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
5904      \def\toctype{app}%
5905      \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
5906    \else
5907      \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
5908      \def\toctype{num}%
5909      \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
5910    \fi\fi\fi
5911    %
5912    % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef).  See comments in \chapmacro.
5913    \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}%
5914    %
5915    % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex).
5916    % Again, see comments in \chapmacro.
5917    \donoderef{#3}%
5918    %
5919    % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed.
5920    % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be
5921    % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the
5922    % \writetocentry if there was no node).  We don't want to allow that
5923    % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the
5924    % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong.  Debian bug 276000.
5925    \nobreak
5926    %
5927    % Output the actual section heading.
5928    \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright
5929          \hangindent=\wd0  % zero if no section number
5930          \unhbox0 #1}%
5931  }%
5932  % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it.
5933  % Don't allow stretch, though.
5934  \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname
5935  %
5936  % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it
5937  % was followed by glue.
5938  \nobreak
5939  %
5940  % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that
5941  % glue accumulate.  (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a
5942  % discardable item.)  However, when a paragraph is not started next
5943  % (\startdefun, \cartouche, \center, etc.), this needs to be wiped out
5944  % or the negative glue will cause weirdly wrong output, typically
5945  % obscuring the section heading with something else.
5946  \vskip-\parskip
5947  %
5948  % This is so the last item on the main vertical list is a known
5949  % \penalty > 10000, so \startdefun, etc., can recognize the situation
5950  % and do the needful.
5951  \penalty 10001
5952}
5953
5954
5955\message{toc,}
5956% Table of contents.
5957\newwrite\tocfile
5958
5959% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
5960% Called from @chapter, etc.
5961%
5962% Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}
5963% We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional
5964% arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually
5965% read this.  The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the
5966% destination to jump to.
5967%
5968% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or
5969% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document.
5970% But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything.  This is used for the
5971% table of contents chapter openings themselves.
5972%
5973\newif\iftocfileopened
5974\def\omitkeyword{omit}%
5975%
5976\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{%
5977  \edef\writetoctype{#1}%
5978  \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else
5979    \iftocfileopened\else
5980      \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
5981      \global\tocfileopenedtrue
5982    \fi
5983    %
5984    \iflinks
5985      {\atdummies
5986       \edef\temp{%
5987         \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
5988       \temp
5989      }%
5990    \fi
5991  \fi
5992  %
5993  % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're
5994  % writing pdf.  These are used in the table of contents.  We can't
5995  % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered
5996  % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first
5997  % two pages of the document.  Thus, we'd have two destinations named
5998  % `1', and two named `2'.
5999  \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
6000}
6001
6002
6003% These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman
6004% fonts, so we must take special care.  This is more or less redundant
6005% with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file.
6006%
6007\def\activecatcodes{%
6008  \catcode`\"=\active
6009  \catcode`\$=\active
6010  \catcode`\<=\active
6011  \catcode`\>=\active
6012  \catcode`\\=\active
6013  \catcode`\^=\active
6014  \catcode`\_=\active
6015  \catcode`\|=\active
6016  \catcode`\~=\active
6017}
6018
6019
6020% Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input.
6021\def\readtocfile{%
6022  \setupdatafile
6023  \activecatcodes
6024  \input \tocreadfilename
6025}
6026
6027\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
6028\newcount\savepageno
6029\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
6030
6031% Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile.
6032%
6033\def\startcontents#1{%
6034  % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
6035  % start on an odd page, unlike chapters.  Thus, we maintain
6036  % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
6037  % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
6038  \contentsalignmacro
6039  \immediate\closeout\tocfile
6040  %
6041  % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
6042  % It is abundantly clear what they are.
6043  \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}%
6044  %
6045  \savepageno = \pageno
6046  \begingroup                  % Set up to handle contents files properly.
6047    \raggedbottom              % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
6048    \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
6049    %
6050    % Roman numerals for page numbers.
6051    \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
6052}
6053
6054% redefined for the two-volume lispref.  We always output on
6055% \jobname.toc even if this is redefined.
6056%
6057\def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc}
6058
6059% Normal (long) toc.
6060%
6061\def\contents{%
6062  \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
6063    \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
6064    \ifeof 1 \else
6065      \readtocfile
6066    \fi
6067    \vfill \eject
6068    \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
6069    \ifeof 1 \else
6070      \pdfmakeoutlines
6071    \fi
6072    \closein 1
6073  \endgroup
6074  \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
6075  \global\pageno = \savepageno
6076}
6077
6078% And just the chapters.
6079\def\summarycontents{%
6080  \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
6081    %
6082    \let\partentry = \shortpartentry
6083    \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry
6084    \let\appentry = \shortchapentry
6085    \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry
6086    % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
6087    \secfonts
6088    \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf
6089    \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt
6090    \rm
6091    \hyphenpenalty = 10000
6092    \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
6093    \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{}
6094    \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry
6095    \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry
6096    \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry
6097    \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry
6098    \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry
6099    \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
6100    \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
6101    \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
6102    \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
6103    \ifeof 1 \else
6104      \readtocfile
6105    \fi
6106    \closein 1
6107    \vfill \eject
6108    \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
6109  \endgroup
6110  \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
6111  \global\pageno = \savepageno
6112}
6113\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
6114
6115% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
6116% The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
6117%
6118\def\shortchaplabel#1{%
6119  % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
6120  % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
6121  % But use \hss just in case.
6122  % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
6123  % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
6124  %
6125  % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange
6126  % with appendix letters.  And right-justifying numbers and
6127  % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10
6128  % chapters.  Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters
6129  % there are before deciding ...
6130  \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}%
6131}
6132
6133% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
6134% The first argument is the chapter or section name.
6135% The last argument is the page number.
6136% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
6137
6138% Parts, in the main contents.  Replace the part number, which doesn't
6139% exist, with an empty box.  Let's hope all the numbers have the same width.
6140% Also ignore the page number, which is conventionally not printed.
6141\def\numeralbox{\setbox0=\hbox{8}\hbox to \wd0{\hfil}}
6142\def\partentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\numeralbox\labelspace#1}{}}
6143%
6144% Parts, in the short toc.
6145\def\shortpartentry#1#2#3#4{%
6146  \penalty-300
6147  \vskip.5\baselineskip plus.15\baselineskip minus.1\baselineskip
6148  \shortchapentry{{\bf #1}}{\numeralbox}{}{}%
6149}
6150
6151% Chapters, in the main contents.
6152\def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
6153%
6154% Chapters, in the short toc.
6155% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.
6156\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{%
6157  \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}%
6158}
6159
6160% Appendices, in the main contents.
6161% Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box.
6162%
6163\def\appendixbox#1{%
6164  % We use M since it's probably the widest letter.
6165  \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}%
6166  \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}}
6167%
6168\def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}}
6169
6170% Unnumbered chapters.
6171\def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}}
6172\def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}}
6173
6174% Sections.
6175\def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
6176\let\appsecentry=\numsecentry
6177\def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}}
6178
6179% Subsections.
6180\def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
6181\let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry
6182\def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
6183
6184% And subsubsections.
6185\def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
6186\let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry
6187\def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
6188
6189% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
6190% Same as \defaultparindent.
6191\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt
6192
6193% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
6194% page number.
6195%
6196% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
6197% if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
6198\def\dochapentry#1#2{%
6199   \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
6200   \begingroup
6201     \chapentryfonts
6202     \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
6203   \endgroup
6204   \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
6205}
6206
6207\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
6208  \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
6209  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
6210\endgroup}
6211
6212\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
6213  \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
6214  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
6215\endgroup}
6216
6217\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
6218  \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
6219  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
6220\endgroup}
6221
6222% We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries.
6223\let\tocentry = \entry
6224
6225% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
6226\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
6227
6228\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
6229\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
6230
6231\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
6232\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
6233\def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
6234\def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
6235
6236
6237\message{environments,}
6238% @foo ... @end foo.
6239
6240% @tex ... @end tex    escapes into raw TeX temporarily.
6241% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
6242% But \@ or @@ will get a plain @ character.
6243
6244\envdef\tex{%
6245  \setupmarkupstyle{tex}%
6246  \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
6247  \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
6248  \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie
6249  \catcode `\%=14
6250  \catcode `\+=\other
6251  \catcode `\"=\other
6252  \catcode `\|=\other
6253  \catcode `\<=\other
6254  \catcode `\>=\other
6255  \catcode`\`=\other
6256  \catcode`\'=\other
6257  \escapechar=`\\
6258  %
6259  % ' is active in math mode (mathcode"8000).  So reset it, and all our
6260  % other math active characters (just in case), to plain's definitions.
6261  \mathactive
6262  %
6263  \let\b=\ptexb
6264  \let\bullet=\ptexbullet
6265  \let\c=\ptexc
6266  \let\,=\ptexcomma
6267  \let\.=\ptexdot
6268  \let\dots=\ptexdots
6269  \let\equiv=\ptexequiv
6270  \let\!=\ptexexclam
6271  \let\i=\ptexi
6272  \let\indent=\ptexindent
6273  \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
6274  \let\{=\ptexlbrace
6275  \let\+=\tabalign
6276  \let\}=\ptexrbrace
6277  \let\/=\ptexslash
6278  \let\*=\ptexstar
6279  \let\t=\ptext
6280  \expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop  % outer
6281  \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing
6282  %
6283  \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
6284  \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
6285  \def\@{@}%
6286}
6287% There is no need to define \Etex.
6288
6289% Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
6290% @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things,
6291% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).
6292
6293% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
6294\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
6295
6296% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
6297% such environments.  \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
6298% have any width.
6299\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
6300
6301% This space is always present above and below environments.
6302\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
6303
6304% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical.  We use \parskip here
6305% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
6306% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
6307% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip.
6308%
6309\def\aboveenvbreak{{%
6310  % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and
6311  % \sectionheading, q.v.
6312  \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
6313    \advance\envskipamount by \parskip
6314    \endgraf
6315    \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
6316      \removelastskip
6317      % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak
6318      % or better ...
6319      \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi
6320      \vskip\envskipamount
6321    \fi
6322  \fi
6323}}
6324
6325\let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
6326
6327% \nonarrowing is a flag.  If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will
6328% also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again.
6329\let\nonarrowing=\relax
6330
6331% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
6332% environment contents.
6333\font\circle=lcircle10
6334\newdimen\circthick
6335\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
6336\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
6337\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
6338%
6339\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
6340\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
6341\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
6342\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
6343\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
6344        \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
6345        \hskip\rskip}}
6346\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
6347        \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
6348        \hskip\rskip}}
6349%
6350\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
6351
6352\envdef\cartouche{%
6353  \ifhmode\par\fi  % can't be in the midst of a paragraph.
6354  \startsavinginserts
6355  \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
6356  \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*.
6357  \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
6358  \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
6359  \cartouter=\hsize
6360  \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt	% allow for 3pt kerns on either
6361				% side, and for 6pt waste from
6362				% each corner char, and rule thickness
6363  \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
6364  % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
6365  \let\nonarrowing = t%
6366  %
6367  % If this cartouche directly follows a sectioning command, we need the
6368  % \parskip glue (backspaced over by default) or the cartouche can
6369  % collide with the section heading.
6370  \ifnum\lastpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \penalty\lastpenalty \fi
6371  %
6372  \vbox\bgroup
6373      \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
6374      \carttop
6375      \hbox\bgroup
6376	  \hskip\lskip
6377	  \vrule\kern3pt
6378	  \vbox\bgroup
6379	      \kern3pt
6380	      \hsize=\cartinner
6381	      \baselineskip=\normbskip
6382	      \lineskip=\normlskip
6383	      \parskip=\normpskip
6384	      \vskip -\parskip
6385	      \comment % For explanation, see the end of def\group.
6386}
6387\def\Ecartouche{%
6388              \ifhmode\par\fi
6389	      \kern3pt
6390	  \egroup
6391	  \kern3pt\vrule
6392	  \hskip\rskip
6393      \egroup
6394      \cartbot
6395  \egroup
6396  \checkinserts
6397}
6398
6399
6400% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
6401% inside a group.
6402\newdimen\nonfillparindent
6403\def\nonfillstart{%
6404  \aboveenvbreak
6405  \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
6406  \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
6407  \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
6408  \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
6409  \parskip = 0pt
6410  % Turn off paragraph indentation but redefine \indent to emulate
6411  % the normal \indent.
6412  \nonfillparindent=\parindent
6413  \parindent = 0pt
6414  \let\indent\nonfillindent
6415  %
6416  \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
6417  \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
6418    \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
6419    \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
6420  \else
6421    \let\nonarrowing = \relax
6422  \fi
6423  \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
6424}
6425
6426\begingroup
6427\obeyspaces
6428% We want to swallow spaces (but not other tokens) after the fake
6429% @indent in our nonfill-environments, where spaces are normally
6430% active and set to @tie, resulting in them not being ignored after
6431% @indent.
6432\gdef\nonfillindent{\futurelet\temp\nonfillindentcheck}%
6433\gdef\nonfillindentcheck{%
6434\ifx\temp %
6435\expandafter\nonfillindentgobble%
6436\else%
6437\leavevmode\nonfillindentbox%
6438\fi%
6439}%
6440\endgroup
6441\def\nonfillindentgobble#1{\nonfillindent}
6442\def\nonfillindentbox{\hbox to \nonfillparindent{\hss}}
6443
6444% If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small.
6445% If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall.
6446% This affects the following displayed environments:
6447%    @example, @display, @format, @lisp
6448%
6449\def\smallword{small}
6450\def\nosmallword{nosmall}
6451\let\SETdispenvsize\relax
6452\def\setnormaldispenv{%
6453  \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword
6454    % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank
6455    % line.  This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but
6456    % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient
6457    % to change the fonts afterward.
6458    \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
6459    \smallexamplefonts \rm
6460  \fi
6461}
6462\def\setsmalldispenv{%
6463  \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword
6464  \else
6465    \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
6466    \smallexamplefonts \rm
6467  \fi
6468}
6469
6470% We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo.
6471% Let's do it in one command.  #1 is the env name, #2 the definition.
6472\def\makedispenvdef#1#2{%
6473  \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}%
6474  \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}%
6475  \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
6476  \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
6477}
6478
6479% Define two environment synonyms (#1 and #2) for an environment.
6480\def\maketwodispenvdef#1#2#3{%
6481  \makedispenvdef{#1}{#3}%
6482  \makedispenvdef{#2}{#3}%
6483}
6484%
6485% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font;
6486% @example: same as @lisp.
6487%
6488% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts.
6489% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
6490%
6491\maketwodispenvdef{lisp}{example}{%
6492  \nonfillstart
6493  \tt\setupmarkupstyle{example}%
6494  \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
6495  \gobble % eat return
6496}
6497% @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font.
6498%
6499\makedispenvdef{display}{%
6500  \nonfillstart
6501  \gobble
6502}
6503
6504% @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
6505%
6506\makedispenvdef{format}{%
6507  \let\nonarrowing = t%
6508  \nonfillstart
6509  \gobble
6510}
6511
6512% @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize.
6513\envdef\flushleft{%
6514  \let\nonarrowing = t%
6515  \nonfillstart
6516  \gobble
6517}
6518\let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak
6519
6520% @flushright.
6521%
6522\envdef\flushright{%
6523  \let\nonarrowing = t%
6524  \nonfillstart
6525  \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill\relax
6526  \gobble
6527}
6528\let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak
6529
6530
6531% @raggedright does more-or-less normal line breaking but no right
6532% justification.  From plain.tex.
6533\envdef\raggedright{%
6534  \rightskip0pt plus2em \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em\relax
6535}
6536\let\Eraggedright\par
6537
6538\envdef\raggedleft{%
6539  \parindent=0pt \leftskip0pt plus2em
6540  \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt
6541  \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off
6542                  % badness reporting.
6543}
6544\let\Eraggedleft\par
6545
6546\envdef\raggedcenter{%
6547  \parindent=0pt \rightskip0pt plus1em \leftskip0pt plus1em
6548  \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt
6549  \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off
6550                  % badness reporting.
6551}
6552\let\Eraggedcenter\par
6553
6554
6555% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
6556% and narrows the margins.  We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since
6557% we're doing normal filling.  So, when using \aboveenvbreak and
6558% \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0.
6559%
6560\makedispenvdef{quotation}{\quotationstart}
6561%
6562\def\quotationstart{%
6563  \indentedblockstart % same as \indentedblock, but increase right margin too.
6564  \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
6565    \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
6566  \fi
6567  \parsearg\quotationlabel
6568}
6569
6570% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
6571% doing normal filling.
6572%
6573\def\Equotation{%
6574  \par
6575  \ifx\quotationauthor\thisisundefined\else
6576    % indent a bit.
6577    \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}%
6578  \fi
6579  {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
6580}
6581\def\Esmallquotation{\Equotation}
6582
6583% If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after.
6584\def\quotationlabel#1{%
6585  \def\temp{#1}%
6586  \ifx\temp\empty \else
6587    {\bf #1: }%
6588  \fi
6589}
6590
6591% @indentedblock is like @quotation, but indents only on the left and
6592% has no optional argument.
6593% 
6594\makedispenvdef{indentedblock}{\indentedblockstart}
6595%
6596\def\indentedblockstart{%
6597  {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
6598  \parindent=0pt
6599  %
6600  % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
6601  \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
6602    \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
6603    \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
6604  \else
6605    \let\nonarrowing = \relax
6606  \fi
6607}
6608
6609% Keep a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're doing normal filling.
6610%
6611\def\Eindentedblock{%
6612  \par
6613  {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
6614}
6615\def\Esmallindentedblock{\Eindentedblock}
6616
6617
6618% LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>}
6619% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter,
6620% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg:
6621% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command.  --janneke@gnu.org
6622%
6623% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996.  The TeXbook.
6624%
6625% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets
6626% active too.  Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a
6627% verbatim line.
6628\def\dospecials{%
6629  \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
6630  \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~%
6631  \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"%
6632  % Don't do the quotes -- if we do, @set txicodequoteundirected and
6633  % @set txicodequotebacktick will not have effect on @verb and
6634  % @verbatim, and ?` and !` ligatures won't get disabled.
6635  %\do\`\do\'%
6636}
6637%
6638% [Knuth] p. 380
6639\def\uncatcodespecials{%
6640  \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials}
6641%
6642% Setup for the @verb command.
6643%
6644% Eight spaces for a tab
6645\begingroup
6646  \catcode`\^^I=\active
6647  \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }}
6648\endgroup
6649%
6650\def\setupverb{%
6651  \tt  % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
6652  \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}%
6653  \setupmarkupstyle{verb}%
6654  \tabeightspaces
6655  % Respect line breaks,
6656  % print special symbols as themselves, and
6657  % make each space count
6658  % must do in this order:
6659  \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
6660}
6661
6662% Setup for the @verbatim environment
6663%
6664% Real tab expansion.
6665\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount
6666%
6667% We typeset each line of the verbatim in an \hbox, so we can handle
6668% tabs.  The \global is in case the verbatim line starts with an accent,
6669% or some other command that starts with a begin-group.  Otherwise, the
6670% entire \verbbox would disappear at the corresponding end-group, before
6671% it is typeset.  Meanwhile, we can't have nested verbatim commands
6672% (can we?), so the \global won't be overwriting itself.
6673\newbox\verbbox
6674\def\starttabbox{\global\setbox\verbbox=\hbox\bgroup}
6675%
6676\begingroup
6677  \catcode`\^^I=\active
6678  \gdef\tabexpand{%
6679    \catcode`\^^I=\active
6680    \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup
6681      \dimen\verbbox=\wd\verbbox % the width so far, or since the previous tab
6682      \divide\dimen\verbbox by\tabw
6683      \multiply\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw
6684      \advance\dimen\verbbox by\tabw  % advance to next multiple of \tabw
6685      \wd\verbbox=\dimen\verbbox \box\verbbox \starttabbox
6686    }%
6687  }
6688\endgroup
6689
6690% start the verbatim environment.
6691\def\setupverbatim{%
6692  \let\nonarrowing = t%
6693  \nonfillstart
6694  \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
6695  % The \leavevmode here is for blank lines.  Otherwise, we would
6696  % never \starttabox and the \egroup would end verbatim mode.
6697  \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box\verbbox\endgraf}%
6698  \tabexpand
6699  \setupmarkupstyle{verbatim}%
6700  % Respect line breaks,
6701  % print special symbols as themselves, and
6702  % make each space count.
6703  % Must do in this order:
6704  \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
6705  \everypar{\starttabbox}%
6706}
6707
6708% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique
6709% delimiter characters.  Before first delimiter expect a
6710% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace:
6711%
6712%    \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1}
6713%
6714% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
6715\begingroup
6716  \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other
6717  \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
6718\endgroup
6719%
6720\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb}
6721%
6722%
6723% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that
6724% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie:
6725%
6726%     \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1}
6727%
6728% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX,
6729% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}':
6730% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'.
6731%
6732% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
6733%
6734\begingroup
6735  \catcode`\ =\active
6736  \obeylines %
6737  % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end
6738  % of the @verbatim input line itself.  Otherwise we get an extra blank
6739  % line in the output.
6740  \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}%
6741  % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but
6742  % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble.
6743\endgroup
6744%
6745\envdef\verbatim{%
6746    \setupverbatim\doverbatim
6747}
6748\let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak
6749
6750
6751% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
6752%
6753\def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude}
6754%
6755\def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
6756  {%
6757    \makevalueexpandable
6758    \setupverbatim
6759    \indexnofonts       % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
6760    \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @verbatiminclude of #1^^J}%
6761    \input #1
6762    \afterenvbreak
6763  }%
6764}
6765
6766% @copying ... @end copying.
6767% Save the text away for @insertcopying later.
6768%
6769% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box.
6770% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the
6771% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done
6772% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source
6773% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as
6774% possible is very desirable.
6775%
6776\def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying}
6777\def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}}
6778%
6779\def\insertcopying{%
6780  \begingroup
6781    \parindent = 0pt  % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page
6782    \scanexp\copyingtext
6783  \endgroup
6784}
6785
6786
6787\message{defuns,}
6788% @defun etc.
6789
6790\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
6791\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
6792\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
6793\newcount\defunpenalty
6794
6795% Start the processing of @deffn:
6796\def\startdefun{%
6797  \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000
6798    \medbreak
6799    \defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the
6800                        % following @def command, see below.
6801  \else
6802    % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
6803    % which is there to keep the function description together with its
6804    % header.  But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a
6805    % break somewhere.  Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted
6806    % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning
6807    % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow
6808    % a break between a section heading and a defun.
6809    %
6810    % As a further refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling
6811    % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the
6812    % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following
6813    % @def command.
6814    \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
6815    %
6816    % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break.
6817    % But do insert the glue.
6818    \medskip  % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint
6819  \fi
6820  %
6821  \parindent=0in
6822  \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
6823  \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
6824}
6825
6826\def\dodefunx#1{%
6827  % First, check whether we are in the right environment:
6828  \checkenv#1%
6829  %
6830  % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row.
6831  % It's not a great place, though.
6832  \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
6833  %
6834  % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun:
6835  \expandafter\gobbledefun#1%
6836}
6837\def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{}
6838
6839% \printdefunline \deffnheader{text}
6840%
6841\def\printdefunline#1#2{%
6842  \begingroup
6843    % call \deffnheader:
6844    #1#2 \endheader
6845    % common ending:
6846    \interlinepenalty = 10000
6847    \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil\relax
6848    \endgraf
6849    \nobreak\vskip -\parskip
6850    \penalty\defunpenalty  % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx
6851    % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses,
6852    % rendering the following check redundant.  But we don't optimize.
6853    \checkparencounts
6854  \endgroup
6855}
6856
6857\def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak}
6858
6859% \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn;
6860% the only thing remaining is to define \deffnheader.
6861%
6862\def\makedefun#1{%
6863  \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun
6864  \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun
6865    \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}%
6866  \temp
6867}
6868
6869% \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader
6870%
6871% Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters.
6872% \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly.
6873%
6874\def\domakedefun#1#2#3{%
6875  \envdef#1{%
6876    \startdefun
6877    \doingtypefnfalse    % distinguish typed functions from all else
6878    \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}%
6879  }%
6880  \def#2{\dodefunx#1}%
6881  \def#3%
6882}
6883
6884\newif\ifdoingtypefn       % doing typed function?
6885\newif\ifrettypeownline    % typeset return type on its own line?
6886
6887% @deftypefnnewline on|off says whether the return type of typed functions
6888% are printed on their own line.  This affects @deftypefn, @deftypefun,
6889% @deftypeop, and @deftypemethod.
6890% 
6891\parseargdef\deftypefnnewline{%
6892  \def\temp{#1}%
6893  \ifx\temp\onword
6894    \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname
6895      = \empty
6896  \else\ifx\temp\offword
6897    \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname
6898      = \relax
6899  \else
6900    \errhelp = \EMsimple
6901    \errmessage{Unknown @txideftypefnnl value `\temp',
6902                must be on|off}%
6903  \fi\fi
6904}
6905
6906% Untyped functions:
6907
6908% @deffn category name args
6909\makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}}
6910
6911% @deffn category class name args
6912\makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
6913
6914% \defopon {category on}class name args
6915\def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
6916
6917% \deffngeneral {subind}category name args
6918%
6919\def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{%
6920  % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}.
6921  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}%
6922  \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}%
6923}
6924
6925% Typed functions:
6926
6927% @deftypefn category type name args
6928\makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}}
6929
6930% @deftypeop category class type name args
6931\makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
6932
6933% \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args
6934\def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
6935
6936% \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args
6937%
6938\def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
6939  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
6940  \doingtypefntrue
6941  \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
6942}
6943
6944% Typed variables:
6945
6946% @deftypevr category type var args
6947\makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}}
6948
6949% @deftypecv category class type var args
6950\makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
6951
6952% \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args
6953\def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
6954
6955% \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args
6956%
6957\def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
6958  \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
6959  \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
6960}
6961
6962% Untyped variables:
6963
6964% @defvr category var args
6965\makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} }
6966
6967% @defcv category class var args
6968\makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
6969
6970% \defcvof {category of}class var args
6971\def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} }
6972
6973% Types:
6974
6975% @deftp category name args
6976\makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{%
6977  \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}%
6978  \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}%
6979}
6980
6981% Remaining @defun-like shortcuts:
6982\makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
6983\makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} }
6984\makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} }
6985\makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
6986\makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
6987\makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} }
6988\makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
6989\makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon}
6990\makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon}
6991\makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
6992\makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
6993
6994% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args).
6995% #1 is the category, such as "Function".
6996% #2 is the return type, if any.
6997% #3 is the function name.
6998%
6999% We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any.
7000%
7001\def\defname#1#2#3{%
7002  \par
7003  % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...
7004  \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
7005  %
7006  % Determine if we are typesetting the return type of a typed function
7007  % on a line by itself.
7008  \rettypeownlinefalse
7009  \ifdoingtypefn  % doing a typed function specifically?
7010    % then check user option for putting return type on its own line:
7011    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname\relax \else
7012      \rettypeownlinetrue
7013    \fi
7014  \fi
7015  %
7016  % How we'll format the category name.  Putting it in brackets helps
7017  % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line
7018  % just below it.
7019  \def\temp{#1}%
7020  \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi}
7021  %
7022  % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape.  We'll always have at
7023  % least two.
7024  \tempnum = 2
7025  %
7026  % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero,
7027  % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it:
7028  \dimen0=\hsize  \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0  \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip
7029  %
7030  % If doing a return type on its own line, we'll have another line.
7031  \ifrettypeownline
7032    \advance\tempnum by 1
7033    \def\maybeshapeline{0in \hsize}%
7034  \else
7035    \def\maybeshapeline{}%
7036  \fi
7037  %
7038  % The continuations:
7039  \dimen2=\hsize  \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent
7040  %
7041  % The final paragraph shape:
7042  \parshape \tempnum  0in \dimen0  \maybeshapeline  \defargsindent \dimen2
7043  %
7044  % Put the category name at the right margin.
7045  \noindent
7046  \hbox to 0pt{%
7047    \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize
7048    % \hsize has to be shortened this way:
7049    \kern\leftskip
7050    % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space.
7051  }%
7052  %
7053  % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint:
7054  \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
7055  \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
7056  {%
7057    % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because:
7058    % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle.
7059    % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's
7060    %   common to leave accents off identifiers.  The result looks ok in
7061    %   tt, but exceedingly strange in rm.
7062    % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures.
7063    % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no
7064    %   one has made identifiers using them :).
7065    \df \tt
7066    \def\temp{#2}% text of the return type
7067    \ifx\temp\empty\else
7068      \tclose{\temp}% typeset the return type
7069      \ifrettypeownline
7070        % put return type on its own line; prohibit line break following:
7071        \hfil\vadjust{\nobreak}\break  
7072      \else
7073        \space  % type on same line, so just followed by a space
7074      \fi
7075    \fi           % no return type
7076    #3% output function name
7077  }%
7078  {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm
7079  %
7080  \boldbrax
7081  % arguments will be output next, if any.
7082}
7083
7084% Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using
7085% tt for the name.  This is because literal text is sometimes needed in
7086% the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very
7087% distinguishable.  Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars.
7088%
7089\def\defunargs#1{%
7090  % use sl by default (not ttsl),
7091  % tt for the names.
7092  \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0
7093  %
7094  % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we
7095  % want a way to get ttsl.  We used to recommend @var for that, so
7096  % leave the code in, but it's strange for @var to lead to typewriter.
7097  % Nowadays we recommend @code, since the difference between a ttsl hyphen
7098  % and a tt hyphen is pretty tiny.  @code also disables ?` !`.
7099  \def\var##1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\ttslanted{##1}}}%
7100  #1%
7101  \sl\hyphenchar\font=45
7102}
7103
7104% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line.
7105%
7106\def\activeparens{%
7107  \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active
7108  \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active
7109  \catcode`\&=\active
7110}
7111
7112% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
7113\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
7114
7115% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc.  For example,
7116% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
7117% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
7118{
7119  \activeparens
7120  \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
7121  \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
7122  \global\let& = \&
7123
7124  \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
7125  \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm}
7126}
7127
7128\newcount\parencount
7129
7130% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
7131\newif\ifampseen
7132\def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\&#1 }}
7133
7134\def\parenfont{%
7135  \ifampseen
7136    % At the first level, print parens in roman,
7137    % otherwise use the default font.
7138    \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi
7139  \else
7140    % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than
7141    % the contained text.  This is especially needed for [ and ] .
7142    \sf
7143  \fi
7144}
7145\def\infirstlevel#1{%
7146  \ifampseen
7147    \ifnum\parencount=1
7148      #1%
7149    \fi
7150  \fi
7151}
7152\def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf}
7153
7154\def\opnr{%
7155  \global\advance\parencount by 1
7156  {\parenfont(}%
7157  \infirstlevel \bfafterword
7158}
7159\def\clnr{%
7160  {\parenfont)}%
7161  \infirstlevel \sl
7162  \global\advance\parencount by -1
7163}
7164
7165\newcount\brackcount
7166\def\lbrb{%
7167  \global\advance\brackcount by 1
7168  {\bf[}%
7169}
7170\def\rbrb{%
7171  {\bf]}%
7172  \global\advance\brackcount by -1
7173}
7174
7175\def\checkparencounts{%
7176  \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi
7177  \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi
7178}
7179% these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually
7180% has such constructs (when documenting function pointers).
7181\def\badparencount{%
7182  \message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}%
7183  \global\parencount=0
7184}
7185\def\badbrackcount{%
7186  \message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}%
7187  \global\brackcount=0
7188}
7189
7190
7191\message{macros,}
7192% @macro.
7193
7194% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
7195% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
7196\ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined
7197  \newwrite\macscribble
7198  \def\scantokens#1{%
7199    \toks0={#1}%
7200    \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
7201    \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
7202    \immediate\closeout\macscribble
7203    \input \jobname.tmp
7204  }
7205\fi
7206
7207\def\scanmacro#1{\begingroup
7208  \newlinechar`\^^M
7209  \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
7210  %
7211  % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
7212  % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active
7213  % backslash to get it printed correctly.  Previously, we had
7214  % \catcode`\\=\other instead.  We'll see whether a problem appears
7215  % with macro expansion.				--kasal, 19aug04
7216  \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@
7217  %
7218  % ... and for \example:
7219  \spaceisspace
7220  %
7221  % The \empty here causes a following catcode 5 newline to be eaten as
7222  % part of reading whitespace after a control sequence.  It does not
7223  % eat a catcode 13 newline.  There's no good way to handle the two
7224  % cases (untried: maybe e-TeX's \everyeof could help, though plain TeX
7225  % would then have different behavior).  See the Macro Details node in
7226  % the manual for the workaround we recommend for macros and
7227  % line-oriented commands.
7228  % 
7229  \scantokens{#1\empty}%
7230\endgroup}
7231
7232\def\scanexp#1{%
7233  \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}%
7234  \temp
7235}
7236
7237\newcount\paramno   % Count of parameters
7238\newtoks\macname    % Macro name
7239\newif\ifrecursive  % Is it recursive?
7240
7241% List of all defined macros in the form
7242%    \definedummyword\macro1\definedummyword\macro2...
7243% Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split
7244% if there is a need.
7245\def\macrolist{}
7246
7247% Add the macro to \macrolist
7248\def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname}
7249\def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{%
7250     \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\definedummyword#1}%
7251     \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}%
7252}
7253
7254% Utility routines.
7255% This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is,
7256%   \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname
7257% (except of course we have to play expansion games).
7258%
7259\def\cslet#1#2{%
7260  \expandafter\let
7261  \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname
7262  \csname#2\endcsname
7263}
7264
7265% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
7266% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
7267{\catcode`\@=11
7268\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
7269\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
7270\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
7271\def\unbrace#1{#1}
7272\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
7273}
7274
7275% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
7276{\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3%
7277\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
7278\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
7279\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
7280}
7281
7282% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
7283% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
7284% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \
7285% to recognize macro arguments; this is the job of \mbodybackslash.
7286%
7287% Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate
7288% them to avoid their expansion.  Must do this non-globally, to
7289% confine the change to the current group.
7290%
7291% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
7292% done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
7293% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
7294%
7295\def\scanctxt{% used as subroutine
7296  \catcode`\"=\other
7297  \catcode`\+=\other
7298  \catcode`\<=\other
7299  \catcode`\>=\other
7300  \catcode`\@=\other
7301  \catcode`\^=\other
7302  \catcode`\_=\other
7303  \catcode`\|=\other
7304  \catcode`\~=\other
7305  \ifx\declaredencoding\ascii \else \setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal\other \fi
7306}
7307
7308\def\scanargctxt{% used for copying and captions, not macros.
7309  \scanctxt
7310  \catcode`\\=\other
7311  \catcode`\^^M=\other
7312}
7313
7314\def\macrobodyctxt{% used for @macro definitions
7315  \scanctxt
7316  \catcode`\{=\other
7317  \catcode`\}=\other
7318  \catcode`\^^M=\other
7319  \usembodybackslash
7320}
7321
7322\def\macroargctxt{% used when scanning invocations
7323  \scanctxt
7324  \catcode`\\=0
7325}
7326% why catcode 0 for \ in the above?  To recognize \\ \{ \} as "escapes"
7327% for the single characters \ { }.  Thus, we end up with the "commands"
7328% that would be written @\ @{ @} in a Texinfo document.
7329% 
7330% We already have @{ and @}.  For @\, we define it here, and only for
7331% this purpose, to produce a typewriter backslash (so, the @\ that we
7332% define for @math can't be used with @macro calls):
7333%
7334\def\\{\normalbackslash}%
7335% 
7336% We would like to do this for \, too, since that is what makeinfo does.
7337% But it is not possible, because Texinfo already has a command @, for a
7338% cedilla accent.  Documents must use @comma{} instead.
7339%
7340% \anythingelse will almost certainly be an error of some kind.
7341
7342
7343% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
7344% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
7345% where N is the macro parameter number.
7346% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
7347% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
7348%
7349{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
7350 @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
7351 @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
7352}
7353\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
7354
7355\def\margbackslash#1{\char`\#1 }
7356
7357\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
7358\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
7359
7360\def\macroxxx#1{%
7361  \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
7362  \ifx\argl\empty       % no arguments
7363     \paramno=0\relax
7364  \else
7365     \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
7366     \if\paramno>256\relax
7367       \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined
7368         \errhelp = \EMsimple
7369         \errmessage{You need eTeX to compile a file with macros with more than 256 arguments}
7370       \fi
7371     \fi
7372  \fi
7373  \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
7374     \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
7375  \else
7376     \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
7377     \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi
7378     \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
7379     \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
7380     \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}%
7381  \fi
7382  \begingroup \macrobodyctxt
7383  \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
7384  \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
7385  \fi}
7386
7387\parseargdef\unmacro{%
7388  \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
7389    \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
7390    \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
7391    % Remove the macro name from \macrolist:
7392    \begingroup
7393      \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax
7394      \let\definedummyword\unmacrodo
7395      \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}%
7396    \endgroup
7397  \else
7398    \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
7399  \fi
7400}
7401
7402% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro.  The idea is to omit any
7403% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax.
7404%
7405\def\unmacrodo#1{%
7406  \ifx #1\relax
7407    % remove this
7408  \else
7409    \noexpand\definedummyword \noexpand#1%
7410  \fi
7411}
7412
7413% This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
7414% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
7415% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
7416\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
7417\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
7418\def\getmacname#1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
7419\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
7420
7421% For macro processing make @ a letter so that we can make Texinfo private macro names.
7422\edef\texiatcatcode{\the\catcode`\@}
7423\catcode `@=11\relax
7424
7425% Parse the optional {params} list.  Set up \paramno and \paramlist
7426% so \defmacro knows what to do.  Define \macarg.BLAH for each BLAH
7427% in the params list to some hook where the argument si to be expanded.  If
7428% there are less than 10 arguments that hook is to be replaced by ##N where N
7429% is the position in that list, that is to say the macro arguments are to be
7430% defined `a la TeX in the macro body.  
7431%
7432% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
7433%
7434% We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
7435% The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something
7436% unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
7437% it to # just before using the token list produced.
7438%
7439% The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
7440% the macro is used.
7441%
7442% If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used, where the
7443% hook remains in the body, and when macro is to be expanded the body is
7444% processed again to replace the arguments.
7445%
7446% In that case, the hook is \the\toks N-1, and we simply set \toks N-1 to the
7447% argument N value and then \edef  the body (nothing else will expand because of
7448% the catcode regime underwhich the body was input).
7449%
7450% If you compile with TeX (not eTeX), and you have macros with 10 or more
7451% arguments, you need that no macro has more than 256 arguments, otherwise an
7452% error is produced.
7453\def\parsemargdef#1;{%
7454  \paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
7455  \let\hash\relax
7456  \let\xeatspaces\relax
7457  \parsemargdefxxx#1,;,%
7458  % In case that there are 10 or more arguments we parse again the arguments
7459  % list to set new definitions for the \macarg.BLAH macros corresponding to
7460  % each BLAH argument. It was anyhow needed to parse already once this list
7461  % in order to count the arguments, and as macros with at most 9 arguments
7462  % are by far more frequent than macro with 10 or more arguments, defining
7463  % twice the \macarg.BLAH macros does not cost too much processing power.
7464  \ifnum\paramno<10\relax\else
7465    \paramno0\relax
7466    \parsemmanyargdef@@#1,;,% 10 or more arguments
7467  \fi
7468}
7469\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
7470  \if#1;\let\next=\relax
7471  \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
7472    \advance\paramno by 1
7473    \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
7474        {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
7475    \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
7476  \fi\next}
7477
7478\def\parsemmanyargdef@@#1,{%
7479  \if#1;\let\next=\relax
7480  \else 
7481    \let\next=\parsemmanyargdef@@
7482    \edef\tempb{\eatspaces{#1}}%
7483    \expandafter\def\expandafter\tempa
7484       \expandafter{\csname macarg.\tempb\endcsname}%
7485    % Note that we need some extra \noexpand\noexpand, this is because we
7486    % don't want \the  to be expanded in the \parsermacbody  as it uses an
7487    % \xdef .
7488    \expandafter\edef\tempa
7489      {\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\the\toks\the\paramno}%
7490    \advance\paramno by 1\relax
7491  \fi\next}
7492
7493% These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
7494% (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
7495%
7496
7497\catcode `\@\texiatcatcode
7498\long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
7499{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
7500\long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
7501{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
7502\catcode `\@=11\relax
7503
7504\let\endargs@\relax
7505\let\nil@\relax
7506\def\nilm@{\nil@}%
7507\long\def\nillm@{\nil@}%
7508
7509% This macro is expanded during the Texinfo macro expansion, not during its
7510% definition.  It gets all the arguments values and assigns them to macros
7511% macarg.ARGNAME
7512%
7513% #1 is the macro name
7514% #2 is the list of argument names
7515% #3 is the list of argument values
7516\def\getargvals@#1#2#3{%
7517  \def\macargdeflist@{}%
7518  \def\saveparamlist@{#2}% Need to keep a copy for parameter expansion.
7519  \def\paramlist{#2,\nil@}%
7520  \def\macroname{#1}%
7521  \begingroup
7522  \macroargctxt
7523  \def\argvaluelist{#3,\nil@}%
7524  \def\@tempa{#3}%
7525  \ifx\@tempa\empty
7526    \setemptyargvalues@
7527  \else
7528    \getargvals@@
7529  \fi
7530}
7531
7532% 
7533\def\getargvals@@{%
7534  \ifx\paramlist\nilm@
7535      % Some sanity check needed here that \argvaluelist is also empty.
7536      \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@
7537      \else
7538        \errhelp = \EMsimple
7539        \errmessage{Too many arguments in macro `\macroname'!}%
7540      \fi
7541      \let\next\macargexpandinbody@
7542  \else
7543    \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@
7544       % No more arguments values passed to macro.  Set remaining named-arg
7545       % macros to empty.
7546       \let\next\setemptyargvalues@
7547    \else
7548      % pop current arg name into \@tempb
7549      \def\@tempa##1{\pop@{\@tempb}{\paramlist}##1\endargs@}%
7550      \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\paramlist}%
7551       % pop current argument value into \@tempc
7552      \def\@tempa##1{\longpop@{\@tempc}{\argvaluelist}##1\endargs@}%
7553      \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\argvaluelist}%
7554       % Here \@tempb is the current arg name and \@tempc is the current arg value.
7555       % First place the new argument macro definition into \@tempd
7556       \expandafter\macname\expandafter{\@tempc}%
7557       \expandafter\let\csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname\relax
7558       \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempe\expandafter{%
7559         \csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname}%
7560       \edef\@tempd{\long\def\@tempe{\the\macname}}%
7561       \push@\@tempd\macargdeflist@
7562       \let\next\getargvals@@
7563    \fi
7564  \fi
7565  \next
7566}
7567
7568\def\push@#1#2{%
7569  \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\def
7570  \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter#2%
7571  \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{%
7572  \expandafter#1#2}%
7573}
7574
7575% Replace arguments by their values in the macro body, and place the result
7576% in macro \@tempa
7577\def\macvalstoargs@{%
7578  %  To do this we use the property that token registers that are \the'ed
7579  % within an \edef  expand only once. So we are going to place all argument
7580  % values into respective token registers.
7581  %
7582  % First we save the token context, and initialize argument numbering.
7583  \begingroup
7584    \paramno0\relax
7585    % Then, for each argument number #N, we place the corresponding argument
7586    % value into a new token list register \toks#N
7587    \expandafter\putargsintokens@\saveparamlist@,;,%
7588    % Then, we expand the body so that argument are replaced by their
7589    % values. The trick for values not to be expanded themselves is that they
7590    % are within tokens and that tokens expand only once in an \edef .
7591    \edef\@tempc{\csname mac.\macroname .body\endcsname}%
7592    % Now we restore the token stack pointer to free the token list registers
7593    % which we have used, but we make sure that expanded body is saved after
7594    % group.
7595    \expandafter
7596  \endgroup
7597  \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\@tempc}%
7598  }
7599
7600\def\macargexpandinbody@{% 
7601  %% Define the named-macro outside of this group and then close this group. 
7602  \expandafter
7603  \endgroup
7604  \macargdeflist@
7605  % First the replace in body the macro arguments by their values, the result
7606  % is in \@tempa .
7607  \macvalstoargs@
7608  % Then we point at the \norecurse or \gobble (for recursive) macro value
7609  % with \@tempb .
7610  \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempb\csname mac.\macroname .recurse\endcsname
7611  % Depending on whether it is recursive or not, we need some tailing
7612  % \egroup .
7613  \ifx\@tempb\gobble
7614     \let\@tempc\relax
7615  \else
7616     \let\@tempc\egroup
7617  \fi
7618  % And now we do the real job:
7619  \edef\@tempd{\noexpand\@tempb{\macroname}\noexpand\scanmacro{\@tempa}\@tempc}%
7620  \@tempd
7621}
7622
7623\def\putargsintokens@#1,{%
7624  \if#1;\let\next\relax
7625  \else
7626    \let\next\putargsintokens@
7627    % First we allocate the new token list register, and give it a temporary
7628    % alias \@tempb .
7629    \toksdef\@tempb\the\paramno
7630    % Then we place the argument value into that token list register.
7631    \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempa\csname macarg.#1\endcsname
7632    \expandafter\@tempb\expandafter{\@tempa}%
7633    \advance\paramno by 1\relax
7634  \fi
7635  \next
7636}
7637
7638% Save the token stack pointer into macro #1
7639\def\texisavetoksstackpoint#1{\edef#1{\the\@cclvi}}
7640% Restore the token stack pointer from number in macro #1
7641\def\texirestoretoksstackpoint#1{\expandafter\mathchardef\expandafter\@cclvi#1\relax}
7642% newtoks that can be used non \outer .
7643\def\texinonouternewtoks{\alloc@ 5\toks \toksdef \@cclvi}
7644
7645% Tailing missing arguments are set to empty
7646\def\setemptyargvalues@{%
7647  \ifx\paramlist\nilm@
7648    \let\next\macargexpandinbody@
7649  \else
7650    \expandafter\setemptyargvaluesparser@\paramlist\endargs@
7651    \let\next\setemptyargvalues@
7652  \fi
7653  \next
7654}
7655
7656\def\setemptyargvaluesparser@#1,#2\endargs@{%
7657  \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{%
7658    \expandafter\def\csname macarg.#1\endcsname{}}%
7659  \push@\@tempa\macargdeflist@
7660  \def\paramlist{#2}%
7661}
7662
7663% #1 is the element target macro
7664% #2 is the list macro
7665% #3,#4\endargs@ is the list value
7666\def\pop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{%
7667   \def#1{#3}%
7668   \def#2{#4}%
7669}
7670\long\def\longpop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{%
7671   \long\def#1{#3}%
7672   \long\def#2{#4}%
7673}
7674
7675% This defines a Texinfo @macro. There are eight cases: recursive and
7676% nonrecursive macros of zero, one, up to nine, and many arguments.
7677% Much magic with \expandafter here.
7678% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
7679% they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
7680%
7681\def\defmacro{%
7682  \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
7683  \ifrecursive
7684    \ifcase\paramno
7685    % 0
7686      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
7687        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
7688    \or % 1
7689      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
7690         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
7691         \noexpand\braceorline
7692         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
7693      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
7694         \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
7695    \else
7696      \ifnum\paramno<10\relax % at most 9
7697        \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
7698           \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
7699           \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
7700        \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
7701            \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
7702        \expandafter\expandafter
7703        \expandafter\xdef
7704        \expandafter\expandafter
7705          \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
7706            \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
7707      \else % 10 or more
7708        \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
7709          \noexpand\getargvals@{\the\macname}{\argl}%
7710        }%    
7711        \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .body\endcsname\temp
7712        \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .recurse\endcsname\gobble
7713      \fi
7714    \fi
7715  \else
7716    \ifcase\paramno
7717    % 0
7718      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
7719        \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
7720        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
7721    \or % 1
7722      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
7723         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
7724         \noexpand\braceorline
7725         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
7726      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
7727        \egroup
7728        \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
7729        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
7730    \else % at most 9
7731      \ifnum\paramno<10\relax
7732        \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
7733           \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
7734           \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
7735        \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
7736            \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
7737        \expandafter\expandafter
7738        \expandafter\xdef
7739        \expandafter\expandafter
7740        \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
7741        \paramlist{%
7742            \egroup
7743            \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
7744            \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
7745      \else % 10 or more:
7746        \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
7747          \noexpand\getargvals@{\the\macname}{\argl}%
7748        }%
7749        \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .body\endcsname\temp
7750        \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .recurse\endcsname\norecurse
7751      \fi
7752    \fi
7753  \fi}
7754
7755\catcode `\@\texiatcatcode\relax
7756
7757\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
7758
7759% \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
7760% {.  If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
7761% line.  Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
7762% as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg).
7763% 
7764\def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
7765\def\braceorlinexxx{%
7766  \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
7767    \expandafter\parsearg
7768  \fi \macnamexxx}
7769
7770
7771% @alias.
7772% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
7773% sign.  Make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
7774%
7775\def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx}
7776\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
7777\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{%
7778  {%
7779    \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty
7780    \addtomacrolist{#1}%
7781    \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}%
7782  }%
7783  \next
7784}
7785
7786
7787\message{cross references,}
7788
7789\newwrite\auxfile
7790\newif\ifhavexrefs    % True if xref values are known.
7791\newif\ifwarnedxrefs  % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
7792
7793% @inforef is relatively simple.
7794\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
7795\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{%
7796  \putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
7797  node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
7798
7799% @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in
7800% cross-references.  The @node line might or might not have commas, and
7801% might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like:
7802% @node foo , bar , ...
7803% We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name.
7804%
7805\parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse}
7806%
7807% also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this:
7808% @node Help-Cross,  ,  , Cross-refs
7809\def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse}
7810\def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
7811
7812\let\nwnode=\node
7813\let\lastnode=\empty
7814
7815% Write a cross-reference definition for the current node.  #1 is the
7816% type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing).
7817%
7818\def\donoderef#1{%
7819  \ifx\lastnode\empty\else
7820    \setref{\lastnode}{#1}%
7821    \global\let\lastnode=\empty
7822  \fi
7823}
7824
7825% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
7826%
7827\newcount\savesfregister
7828%
7829\def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
7830\def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
7831\def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
7832
7833% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an
7834% anchor), which consists of three parts:
7835% 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \lastsection,
7836%                 or the anchor name.
7837% 2) NAME-snt   - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or
7838%                 empty for anchors.
7839% 3) NAME-pg    - the page number.
7840%
7841% This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat.  In the case of
7842% floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here:
7843% 4) NAME-lof   - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats.
7844%
7845\def\setref#1#2{%
7846  \pdfmkdest{#1}%
7847  \iflinks
7848    {%
7849      \atdummies  % preserve commands, but don't expand them
7850      \edef\writexrdef##1##2{%
7851	\write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef
7852	  ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef
7853      }%
7854      \toks0 = \expandafter{\lastsection}%
7855      \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }%
7856      \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc.
7857      \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, at \shipout
7858    }%
7859  \fi
7860}
7861
7862% @xrefautosectiontitle on|off says whether @section(ing) names are used
7863% automatically in xrefs, if the third arg is not explicitly specified.
7864% This was provided as a "secret" @set xref-automatic-section-title
7865% variable, now it's official.
7866% 
7867\parseargdef\xrefautomaticsectiontitle{%
7868  \def\temp{#1}%
7869  \ifx\temp\onword
7870    \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname
7871      = \empty
7872  \else\ifx\temp\offword
7873    \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname
7874      = \relax
7875  \else
7876    \errhelp = \EMsimple
7877    \errmessage{Unknown @xrefautomaticsectiontitle value `\temp',
7878                must be on|off}%
7879  \fi\fi
7880}
7881
7882% 
7883% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references.  For \xrefX, #1 is
7884% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
7885% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
7886% manual.  All but the node name can be omitted.
7887%
7888\def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
7889\def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
7890\def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
7891%
7892\newbox\toprefbox
7893\newbox\printedrefnamebox
7894\newbox\infofilenamebox
7895\newbox\printedmanualbox
7896%
7897\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
7898  \unsepspaces
7899  %
7900  % Get args without leading/trailing spaces.
7901  \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}%
7902  \setbox\printedrefnamebox = \hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}%
7903  %
7904  \def\infofilename{\ignorespaces #4}%
7905  \setbox\infofilenamebox = \hbox{\infofilename\unskip}%
7906  %
7907  \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
7908  \setbox\printedmanualbox  = \hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}%
7909  %
7910  % If the printed reference name (arg #3) was not explicitly given in
7911  % the @xref, figure out what we want to use.
7912  \ifdim \wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt
7913    % No printed node name was explicitly given.
7914    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname \relax
7915      % Not auto section-title: use node name inside the square brackets.
7916      \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
7917    \else
7918      % Auto section-title: use chapter/section title inside
7919      % the square brackets if we have it.
7920      \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
7921        % It is in another manual, so we don't have it; use node name.
7922        \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
7923      \else
7924        \ifhavexrefs
7925          % We (should) know the real title if we have the xref values.
7926          \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
7927        \else
7928          % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
7929          \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
7930        \fi%
7931      \fi
7932    \fi
7933  \fi
7934  %
7935  % Make link in pdf output.
7936  \ifpdf
7937    {\indexnofonts
7938     \turnoffactive
7939     \makevalueexpandable
7940     % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _
7941     % etc. don't get their TeX definitions.  This ignores all spaces in
7942     % #4, including (wrongly) those in the middle of the filename.
7943     \getfilename{#4}%
7944     %
7945     % This (wrongly) does not take account of leading or trailing
7946     % spaces in #1, which should be ignored.
7947     \edef\pdfxrefdest{#1}%
7948     \ifx\pdfxrefdest\empty
7949       \def\pdfxrefdest{Top}% no empty targets
7950     \else
7951       \txiescapepdf\pdfxrefdest  % escape PDF special chars
7952     \fi
7953     %
7954     \leavevmode
7955     \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
7956     \ifnum\filenamelength>0
7957       goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfxrefdest}%
7958     \else
7959       goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfxrefdest}}%
7960     \fi
7961    }%
7962    \setcolor{\linkcolor}%
7963  \fi
7964  %
7965  % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2"
7966  % instead of "[somenode], p.3".  We distinguish them by the
7967  % LABEL-title being set to a magic string.
7968  {%
7969    % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to
7970    % include an _ in the xref name, etc.
7971    \indexnofonts
7972    \turnoffactive
7973    \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle
7974      \csname XR#1-title\endcsname
7975  }%
7976  \iffloat\Xthisreftitle
7977    % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref,
7978    % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2".
7979    \ifdim\wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt
7980      \refx{#1-snt}{}%
7981    \else
7982      \printedrefname
7983    \fi
7984    %
7985    % If the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append
7986    % "in MANUALNAME".
7987    \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
7988      \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
7989    \fi
7990  \else
7991    % node/anchor (non-float) references.
7992    % 
7993    % If we use \unhbox to print the node names, TeX does not insert
7994    % empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will not
7995    % find a line break at a hyphen in a node names.  Since some manuals
7996    % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens,
7997    % this is a loss.  Therefore, we give the text of the node name
7998    % again, so it is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
7999    % 
8000    \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
8001      % Cross-manual reference with a printed manual name.
8002      % 
8003      \crossmanualxref{\cite{\printedmanual\unskip}}%
8004    %
8005    \else\ifdim \wd\infofilenamebox > 0pt
8006      % Cross-manual reference with only an info filename (arg 4), no
8007      % printed manual name (arg 5).  This is essentially the same as
8008      % the case above; we output the filename, since we have nothing else.
8009      % 
8010      \crossmanualxref{\code{\infofilename\unskip}}%
8011    %
8012    \else
8013      % Reference within this manual.
8014      %
8015      % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
8016      % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
8017      % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
8018      % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
8019      % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
8020      {\turnoffactive
8021       % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
8022       % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
8023       \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
8024       \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
8025      }%
8026      % output the `[mynode]' via the macro below so it can be overridden.
8027      \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname
8028      %
8029      % But we always want a comma and a space:
8030      ,\space
8031      %
8032      % output the `page 3'.
8033      \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
8034    \fi\fi
8035  \fi
8036  \endlink
8037\endgroup}
8038
8039% Output a cross-manual xref to #1.  Used just above (twice).
8040% 
8041% Only include the text "Section ``foo'' in" if the foo is neither
8042% missing or Top.  Thus, @xref{,,,foo,The Foo Manual} outputs simply
8043% "see The Foo Manual", the idea being to refer to the whole manual.
8044% 
8045% But, this being TeX, we can't easily compare our node name against the
8046% string "Top" while ignoring the possible spaces before and after in
8047% the input.  By adding the arbitrary 7sp below, we make it much less
8048% likely that a real node name would have the same width as "Top" (e.g.,
8049% in a monospaced font).  Hopefully it will never happen in practice.
8050% 
8051% For the same basic reason, we retypeset the "Top" at every
8052% reference, since the current font is indeterminate.
8053% 
8054\def\crossmanualxref#1{%
8055  \setbox\toprefbox = \hbox{Top\kern7sp}%
8056  \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \printedrefname \unskip \kern7sp}%
8057  \ifdim \wd2 > 7sp  % nonempty?
8058    \ifdim \wd2 = \wd\toprefbox \else  % same as Top?
8059      \putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{}\space
8060    \fi
8061  \fi
8062  #1%
8063}
8064
8065% This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref
8066% output.  It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily,
8067% since square brackets don't work well in some documents.  Particularly
8068% one that Bob is working on :).
8069%
8070\def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]}
8071
8072% Things referred to by \setref.
8073%
8074\def\Ynothing{}
8075\def\Yomitfromtoc{}
8076\def\Ynumbered{%
8077  \ifnum\secno=0
8078    \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno
8079  \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
8080    \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno
8081  \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
8082    \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
8083  \else
8084    \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
8085  \fi\fi\fi
8086}
8087\def\Yappendix{%
8088  \ifnum\secno=0
8089     \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}%
8090  \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
8091     \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno
8092  \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
8093    \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
8094  \else
8095    \putwordSection@tie
8096      @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
8097  \fi\fi\fi
8098}
8099
8100% Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
8101% If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
8102%
8103\def\refx#1#2{%
8104  {%
8105    \indexnofonts
8106    \otherbackslash
8107    \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX
8108      \csname XR#1\endcsname
8109  }%
8110  \ifx\thisrefX\relax
8111    % If not defined, say something at least.
8112    \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
8113    \iflinks
8114      \ifhavexrefs
8115        {\toks0 = {#1}% avoid expansion of possibly-complex value
8116         \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `\the\toks0'.}}%
8117      \else
8118        \ifwarnedxrefs\else
8119          \global\warnedxrefstrue
8120          \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
8121        \fi
8122      \fi
8123    \fi
8124  \else
8125    % It's defined, so just use it.
8126    \thisrefX
8127  \fi
8128  #2% Output the suffix in any case.
8129}
8130
8131% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file.  Usually it's
8132% just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid
8133% collisions).  But if this is a float type, we have more work to do.
8134%
8135\def\xrdef#1#2{%
8136  {% The node name might contain 8-bit characters, which in our current
8137   % implementation are changed to commands like @'e.  Don't let these
8138   % mess up the control sequence name.
8139    \indexnofonts
8140    \turnoffactive
8141    \xdef\safexrefname{#1}%
8142  }%
8143  %
8144  \expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref
8145  %
8146  % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float?
8147  \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname
8148    % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype.
8149    \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist
8150      \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname
8151    %
8152    % Is this the first time we've seen this float type?
8153    \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax
8154      \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do
8155    \else
8156      % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list.
8157      \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}%
8158    \fi
8159    %
8160    % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE,
8161    % for later use in \listoffloats.
8162    \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0
8163      {\safexrefname}}%
8164  \fi
8165}
8166
8167% Read the last existing aux file, if any.  No error if none exists.
8168%
8169\def\tryauxfile{%
8170  \openin 1 \jobname.aux
8171  \ifeof 1 \else
8172    \readdatafile{aux}%
8173    \global\havexrefstrue
8174  \fi
8175  \closein 1
8176}
8177
8178\def\setupdatafile{%
8179  \catcode`\^^@=\other
8180  \catcode`\^^A=\other
8181  \catcode`\^^B=\other
8182  \catcode`\^^C=\other
8183  \catcode`\^^D=\other
8184  \catcode`\^^E=\other
8185  \catcode`\^^F=\other
8186  \catcode`\^^G=\other
8187  \catcode`\^^H=\other
8188  \catcode`\^^K=\other
8189  \catcode`\^^L=\other
8190  \catcode`\^^N=\other
8191  \catcode`\^^P=\other
8192  \catcode`\^^Q=\other
8193  \catcode`\^^R=\other
8194  \catcode`\^^S=\other
8195  \catcode`\^^T=\other
8196  \catcode`\^^U=\other
8197  \catcode`\^^V=\other
8198  \catcode`\^^W=\other
8199  \catcode`\^^X=\other
8200  \catcode`\^^Z=\other
8201  \catcode`\^^[=\other
8202  \catcode`\^^\=\other
8203  \catcode`\^^]=\other
8204  \catcode`\^^^=\other
8205  \catcode`\^^_=\other
8206  % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
8207  % in xref tags, i.e., node names.  But since ^^e4 notation isn't
8208  % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable.  Furthermore,
8209  % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
8210  % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
8211  % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
8212  % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence.  It could
8213  % all be worked out, but why?  Either we support ^^ or we don't.
8214  %
8215  % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
8216  % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
8217  % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
8218  %
8219  \catcode`\^=\other
8220  %
8221  % Special characters.  Should be turned off anyway, but...
8222  \catcode`\~=\other
8223  \catcode`\[=\other
8224  \catcode`\]=\other
8225  \catcode`\"=\other
8226  \catcode`\_=\other
8227  \catcode`\|=\other
8228  \catcode`\<=\other
8229  \catcode`\>=\other
8230  \catcode`\$=\other
8231  \catcode`\#=\other
8232  \catcode`\&=\other
8233  \catcode`\%=\other
8234  \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
8235  %
8236  % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \
8237  % characters end up in a \csname.  It's easier than
8238  % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \
8239  % character.  What I don't understand is why it works in the *value*
8240  % of the xrdef.  Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that
8241  % should not typeset properly.  But it works, so I'm moving on for
8242  % now.  --karl, 15jan04.
8243  \catcode`\\=\other
8244  %
8245  % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters.
8246  {%
8247    \count1=128
8248    \def\loop{%
8249      \catcode\count1=\other
8250      \advance\count1 by 1
8251      \ifnum \count1<256 \loop \fi
8252    }%
8253  }%
8254  %
8255  % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces.
8256  \catcode`\{=1
8257  \catcode`\}=2
8258  \catcode`\@=0
8259}
8260
8261\def\readdatafile#1{%
8262\begingroup
8263  \setupdatafile
8264  \input\jobname.#1
8265\endgroup}
8266
8267
8268\message{insertions,}
8269% including footnotes.
8270
8271\newcount \footnoteno
8272
8273% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
8274% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
8275% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
8276% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
8277% space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
8278\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
8279
8280% @footnotestyle is meaningful for Info output only.
8281\let\footnotestyle=\comment
8282
8283{\catcode `\@=11
8284%
8285% Auto-number footnotes.  Otherwise like plain.
8286\gdef\footnote{%
8287  \let\indent=\ptexindent
8288  \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
8289  \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
8290  \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
8291  %
8292  % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
8293  % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
8294  \let\@sf\empty
8295  \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi
8296  %
8297  % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
8298  \unskip
8299  \thisfootno\@sf
8300  \dofootnote
8301}%
8302
8303% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
8304% footnote text as a parameter.  Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
8305%
8306% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses
8307% \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
8308% the footnote is read.  --karl, 16nov96.
8309%
8310\gdef\dofootnote{%
8311  \insert\footins\bgroup
8312  % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
8313  % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
8314  % So reset some parameters.
8315  \hsize=\pagewidth
8316  \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
8317  \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
8318  \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
8319  \floatingpenalty\@MM
8320  \leftskip\z@skip
8321  \rightskip\z@skip
8322  \spaceskip\z@skip
8323  \xspaceskip\z@skip
8324  \parindent\defaultparindent
8325  %
8326  \smallfonts \rm
8327  %
8328  % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears
8329  % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op.  makeinfo does not use
8330  % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote
8331  % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style).
8332  \let\noindent = \relax
8333  %
8334  % Hang the footnote text off the number.  Use \everypar in case the
8335  % footnote extends for more than one paragraph.
8336  \everypar = {\hang}%
8337  \textindent{\thisfootno}%
8338  %
8339  % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text.  Since this
8340  % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
8341  % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
8342  \footstrut
8343  %
8344  % Invoke rest of plain TeX footnote routine.
8345  \futurelet\next\fo@t
8346}
8347}%end \catcode `\@=11
8348
8349% In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create
8350% the real \insert just after the vbox finished.  Otherwise, the insertion
8351% would be lost.
8352% Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote
8353% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished.
8354% And the same can be done for other insert classes.  --kasal, 16nov03.
8355
8356% Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro.
8357% Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled
8358% out prematurely.
8359%
8360\def\startsavinginserts{%
8361  \ifx \insert\ptexinsert
8362    \let\insert\saveinsert
8363  \else
8364    \let\checkinserts\relax
8365  \fi
8366}
8367
8368% This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and
8369% \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}.
8370%
8371\def\saveinsert#1{%
8372  \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}%
8373  \afterassignment\next
8374  % swallow the left brace
8375  \let\temp =
8376}
8377\def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}}
8378\def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1}
8379
8380\def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi}
8381
8382\def\placesaveins#1{%
8383  \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname
8384    {\box#1}%
8385}
8386
8387% eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other:
8388{
8389  \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials  %  ;-)
8390  \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{}
8391}
8392
8393% initialization:
8394\def\newsaveins #1{%
8395  \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}%
8396  \next
8397}
8398\def\newsaveinsX #1{%
8399  \csname newbox\endcsname #1%
8400  \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts
8401    \checksaveins #1}%
8402}
8403
8404% initialize:
8405\let\checkinserts\empty
8406\newsaveins\footins
8407\newsaveins\margin
8408
8409
8410% @image.  We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
8411% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
8412%
8413% Check for and read epsf.tex up front.  If we read it only at @image
8414% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
8415% undone and the next image would fail.
8416\openin 1 = epsf.tex
8417\ifeof 1 \else
8418  % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in
8419  % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan).
8420  \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
8421  \input epsf.tex
8422\fi
8423\closein 1
8424%
8425% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
8426\newif\ifwarnednoepsf
8427\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
8428  work.  It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
8429  it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
8430%
8431\def\image#1{%
8432  \ifx\epsfbox\thisisundefined
8433    \ifwarnednoepsf \else
8434      \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
8435      \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
8436      \global\warnednoepsftrue
8437    \fi
8438  \else
8439    \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish
8440  \fi
8441}
8442%
8443% Arguments to @image:
8444% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
8445% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
8446% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text.
8447% #5 is (ignored optional) extension.
8448% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing stuff.
8449\newif\ifimagevmode
8450\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup
8451  \catcode`\^^M = 5     % in case we're inside an example
8452  \normalturnoffactive  % allow _ et al. in names
8453  % If the image is by itself, center it.
8454  \ifvmode
8455    \imagevmodetrue
8456  \else \ifx\centersub\centerV
8457    % for @center @image, we need a vbox so we can have our vertical space
8458    \imagevmodetrue
8459    \vbox\bgroup % vbox has better behavior than vtop herev
8460  \fi\fi
8461  %
8462  \ifimagevmode
8463    \nobreak\medskip
8464    % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
8465    % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
8466    % above and below.
8467    \nobreak\vskip\parskip
8468    \nobreak
8469  \fi
8470  %
8471  % Leave vertical mode so that indentation from an enclosing
8472  %  environment such as @quotation is respected.
8473  % However, if we're at the top level, we don't want the
8474  %  normal paragraph indentation.
8475  % On the other hand, if we are in the case of @center @image, we don't
8476  %  want to start a paragraph, which will create a hsize-width box and
8477  %  eradicate the centering.
8478  \ifx\centersub\centerV\else \noindent \fi
8479  %
8480  % Output the image.
8481  \ifpdf
8482    \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
8483  \else
8484    % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
8485    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
8486    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
8487    \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
8488  \fi
8489  %
8490  \ifimagevmode
8491    \medskip  % space after a standalone image
8492  \fi  
8493  \ifx\centersub\centerV \egroup \fi
8494\endgroup}
8495
8496
8497% @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables,
8498% etc.  We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the
8499% float "here".  But it seemed the best name for the future.
8500%
8501\envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish}
8502
8503% There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it.
8504\def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,}
8505
8506% #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically
8507% "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc.  Can't contain commas.  If omitted,
8508% this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to.
8509%
8510% #2 is the optional xref label.  Also must be present for the float to
8511% be referable.
8512%
8513% #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored.  It
8514% will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom).
8515%
8516% We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each
8517% chapter-level command.
8518\let\resetallfloatnos=\empty
8519%
8520\def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
8521  \let\thiscaption=\empty
8522  \let\thisshortcaption=\empty
8523  %
8524  % don't lose footnotes inside @float.
8525  %
8526  % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an
8527  % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04
8528  %
8529  \startsavinginserts
8530  %
8531  % We can't be used inside a paragraph.
8532  \par
8533  %
8534  \vtop\bgroup
8535    \def\floattype{#1}%
8536    \def\floatlabel{#2}%
8537    \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet.
8538    %
8539    \ifx\floattype\empty
8540      \let\safefloattype=\empty
8541    \else
8542      {%
8543        % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
8544        % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
8545        \indexnofonts
8546        \turnoffactive
8547        \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
8548      }%
8549    \fi
8550    %
8551    % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type.
8552    \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
8553      % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1,
8554      % Table 1, Figure 2, ...).  (And if no label, no number.)
8555      %
8556      \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname
8557      \global\advance\floatno by 1
8558      %
8559      {%
8560        % This magic value for \lastsection is output by \setref as the
8561        % XREFLABEL-title value.  \xrefX uses it to distinguish float
8562        % labels (which have a completely different output format) from
8563        % node and anchor labels.  And \xrdef uses it to construct the
8564        % lists of floats.
8565        %
8566        \edef\lastsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}%
8567        \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}%
8568      }%
8569    \fi
8570    %
8571    % start with \parskip glue, I guess.
8572    \vskip\parskip
8573    %
8574    % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section.
8575    \restorefirstparagraphindent
8576}
8577
8578% we have these possibilities:
8579% @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap
8580% @float Foo,lbl & no caption:    Foo 1.1
8581% @float Foo & @caption{Cap}:     Foo: Cap
8582% @float Foo & no caption:        Foo
8583% @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}:     1.1: Cap
8584% @float ,lbl & no caption:       1.1
8585% @float & @caption{Cap}:         Cap
8586% @float & no caption:
8587%
8588\def\Efloat{%
8589    \let\floatident = \empty
8590    %
8591    % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first.
8592    \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi
8593    %
8594    % If we have an xref label, the number comes next.
8595    \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
8596      \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first.
8597        \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}%
8598      \fi
8599      % the number.
8600      \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
8601    \fi
8602    %
8603    % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in
8604    % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again.
8605    \let\captionline = \floatident
8606    %
8607    \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else
8608      \ifx\floatident\empty \else
8609	\appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between
8610      \fi
8611      %
8612      % caption text.
8613      \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}%
8614    \fi
8615    %
8616    % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before.
8617    % Eventually this needs to become an \insert.
8618    \ifx\captionline\empty \else
8619      \vskip.5\parskip
8620      \captionline
8621      %
8622      % Space below caption.
8623      \vskip\parskip
8624    \fi
8625    %
8626    % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info.  Do this
8627    % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint.
8628    \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
8629      % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as
8630      % \floatlabel-lof.  Besides \floatident, we include the short
8631      % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing.
8632      {%
8633        \atdummies
8634        %
8635        % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M
8636        % is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so
8637        % we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file.
8638	\scanexp{%
8639	  \xdef\noexpand\gtemp{%
8640	    \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty
8641	      \thiscaption
8642	    \else
8643	      \thisshortcaption
8644	    \fi
8645	  }%
8646	}%
8647        \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident
8648	  \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}%
8649      }%
8650    \fi
8651  \egroup  % end of \vtop
8652  %
8653  % place the captured inserts
8654  %
8655  % BEWARE: when the floats start floating, we have to issue warning
8656  % whenever an insert appears inside a float which could possibly
8657  % float. --kasal, 26may04
8658  %
8659  \checkinserts
8660}
8661
8662% Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either.
8663%
8664\def\appendtomacro#1#2{%
8665  \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}%
8666}
8667
8668% @caption, @shortcaption
8669%
8670\def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption}
8671\def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption}
8672\def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption}
8673\def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}}
8674
8675% The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are
8676% going to use.  Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno.
8677\def\getfloatno#1{%
8678  \ifx#1\relax
8679      % Haven't seen this figure type before.
8680      \csname newcount\endcsname #1%
8681      %
8682      % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap.
8683      \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos
8684        \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }%
8685  \fi
8686  \let\floatno#1%
8687}
8688
8689% \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value.  We want an @xref
8690% to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1".  We call \setref when we
8691% first read the @float command.
8692%
8693\def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
8694
8695% Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can
8696% distinguish floats from other xref types.
8697\def\floatmagic{!!float!!}
8698
8699% #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional
8700% which is true if #1 represents a float ref.  That is, the magic
8701% \lastsection value which we \setref above.
8702%
8703\def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish}
8704%
8705% #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string.  If so, #2 will be the
8706% (safe) float type for this float.  We set \iffloattype to #2.
8707%
8708\def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{%
8709  \def\temp{#1}%
8710  \def\iffloattype{#2}%
8711  \ifx\temp\floatmagic
8712}
8713
8714% @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents.
8715%
8716\parseargdef\listoffloats{%
8717  \def\floattype{#1}% floattype
8718  {%
8719    % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
8720    % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
8721    \indexnofonts
8722    \turnoffactive
8723    \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
8724  }%
8725  %
8726  % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE.
8727  \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax
8728    \ifhavexrefs
8729      % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo.
8730      \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}%
8731    \fi
8732  \else
8733    \begingroup
8734      \leftskip=\tocindent  % indent these entries like a toc
8735      \let\do=\listoffloatsdo
8736      \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname
8737    \endgroup
8738  \fi
8739}
8740
8741% This is called on each entry in a list of floats.  We're passed the
8742% xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the
8743% aux file.  We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which
8744% has the text we're supposed to typeset here.
8745%
8746% Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since
8747% they won't appear in the aux file).
8748%
8749\def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish}
8750\def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{%
8751  % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything.  Just
8752  % pass the control sequence.  On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the
8753  % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link
8754  % in pdf output.
8755  \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}%
8756  %
8757  % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index.
8758  \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}%
8759  \writeentry
8760}}
8761
8762
8763\message{localization,}
8764
8765% For single-language documents, @documentlanguage is usually given very
8766% early, just after @documentencoding.  Single argument is the language
8767% (de) or locale (de_DE) abbreviation.
8768%
8769{
8770  \catcode`\_ = \active
8771  \globaldefs=1
8772\parseargdef\documentlanguage{\begingroup
8773  \let_=\normalunderscore  % normal _ character for filenames
8774  \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
8775    % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists.
8776    \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
8777    \ifeof 1
8778      \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore{#1_\finish}%
8779    \else
8780      \globaldefs = 1  % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist
8781      \input txi-#1.tex
8782    \fi
8783    \closein 1
8784  \endgroup % end raw TeX
8785\endgroup}
8786%
8787% If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist,
8788% try txi-de.tex.
8789%
8790\gdef\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{%
8791  \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
8792  \ifeof 1
8793    \errhelp = \nolanghelp
8794    \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
8795  \else
8796    \globaldefs = 1  % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist
8797    \input txi-#1.tex
8798  \fi
8799  \closein 1
8800}
8801}% end of special _ catcode
8802%
8803\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
8804is empty.  Maybe you need to install it?  Putting it in the current
8805directory should work if nowhere else does.}
8806
8807% This macro is called from txi-??.tex files; the first argument is the
8808% \language name to set (without the "\lang@" prefix), the second and
8809% third args are \{left,right}hyphenmin.
8810%
8811% The language names to pass are determined when the format is built.
8812% See the etex.log file created at that time, e.g.,
8813% /usr/local/texlive/2008/texmf-var/web2c/pdftex/etex.log.
8814%
8815% With TeX Live 2008, etex now includes hyphenation patterns for all
8816% available languages.  This means we can support hyphenation in
8817% Texinfo, at least to some extent.  (This still doesn't solve the
8818% accented characters problem.)
8819%
8820\catcode`@=11
8821\def\txisetlanguage#1#2#3{%
8822  % do not set the language if the name is undefined in the current TeX.
8823  \expandafter\ifx\csname lang@#1\endcsname \relax
8824    \message{no patterns for #1}%
8825  \else
8826    \global\language = \csname lang@#1\endcsname
8827  \fi
8828  % but there is no harm in adjusting the hyphenmin values regardless.
8829  \global\lefthyphenmin = #2\relax
8830  \global\righthyphenmin = #3\relax
8831}
8832
8833% Helpers for encodings.
8834% Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number.
8835%
8836\def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{%
8837   \count255=128
8838   \loop\ifnum\count255<256
8839      \global\catcode\count255=#1\relax
8840      \advance\count255 by 1
8841   \repeat
8842}
8843
8844\def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{%
8845   \count255=128
8846   \loop\ifnum\count255<256
8847      \catcode\count255=#1\relax
8848      \advance\count255 by 1
8849   \repeat
8850}
8851
8852% @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters
8853% according to the specified encoding.
8854%
8855\parseargdef\documentencoding{%
8856  % Encoding being declared for the document.
8857  \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}%
8858  %
8859  % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able
8860  % to compare them with \ifx.
8861  \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}%
8862  \def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}%
8863  \def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}%
8864  \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}%
8865  \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}%
8866  %
8867  \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii
8868     \asciichardefs
8869  %
8870  \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo
8871     \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
8872     \lattwochardefs
8873  %
8874  \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone
8875     \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
8876     \latonechardefs
8877  %
8878  \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine
8879     \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
8880     \latninechardefs
8881  %
8882  \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight
8883     \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
8884     \utfeightchardefs
8885  %
8886  \else
8887    \message{Unknown document encoding #1, ignoring.}%
8888  %
8889  \fi % utfeight
8890  \fi % latnine
8891  \fi % latone
8892  \fi % lattwo
8893  \fi % ascii
8894}
8895
8896% A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available
8897% the default font encoding (OT1).
8898%
8899\def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing in OT1 encoding: #1.}}
8900
8901% Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference.
8902\def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi}
8903
8904% First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be
8905% correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of
8906% macros containing the character definitions.
8907\setnonasciicharscatcode\active
8908%
8909% Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions.
8910\def\latonechardefs{%
8911  \gdef^^a0{\tie}
8912  \gdef^^a1{\exclamdown}
8913  \gdef^^a2{\missingcharmsg{CENT SIGN}}
8914  \gdef^^a3{{\pounds}}
8915  \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}}
8916  \gdef^^a5{\missingcharmsg{YEN SIGN}}
8917  \gdef^^a6{\missingcharmsg{BROKEN BAR}}
8918  \gdef^^a7{\S}
8919  \gdef^^a8{\"{}}
8920  \gdef^^a9{\copyright}
8921  \gdef^^aa{\ordf}
8922  \gdef^^ab{\guillemetleft}
8923  \gdef^^ac{$\lnot$}
8924  \gdef^^ad{\-}
8925  \gdef^^ae{\registeredsymbol}
8926  \gdef^^af{\={}}
8927  %
8928  \gdef^^b0{\textdegree}
8929  \gdef^^b1{$\pm$}
8930  \gdef^^b2{$^2$}
8931  \gdef^^b3{$^3$}
8932  \gdef^^b4{\'{}}
8933  \gdef^^b5{$\mu$}
8934  \gdef^^b6{\P}
8935  %
8936  \gdef^^b7{$^.$}
8937  \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ }
8938  \gdef^^b9{$^1$}
8939  \gdef^^ba{\ordm}
8940  %
8941  \gdef^^bb{\guillemetright}
8942  \gdef^^bc{$1\over4$}
8943  \gdef^^bd{$1\over2$}
8944  \gdef^^be{$3\over4$}
8945  \gdef^^bf{\questiondown}
8946  %
8947  \gdef^^c0{\`A}
8948  \gdef^^c1{\'A}
8949  \gdef^^c2{\^A}
8950  \gdef^^c3{\~A}
8951  \gdef^^c4{\"A}
8952  \gdef^^c5{\ringaccent A}
8953  \gdef^^c6{\AE}
8954  \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C}
8955  \gdef^^c8{\`E}
8956  \gdef^^c9{\'E}
8957  \gdef^^ca{\^E}
8958  \gdef^^cb{\"E}
8959  \gdef^^cc{\`I}
8960  \gdef^^cd{\'I}
8961  \gdef^^ce{\^I}
8962  \gdef^^cf{\"I}
8963  %
8964  \gdef^^d0{\DH}
8965  \gdef^^d1{\~N}
8966  \gdef^^d2{\`O}
8967  \gdef^^d3{\'O}
8968  \gdef^^d4{\^O}
8969  \gdef^^d5{\~O}
8970  \gdef^^d6{\"O}
8971  \gdef^^d7{$\times$}
8972  \gdef^^d8{\O}
8973  \gdef^^d9{\`U}
8974  \gdef^^da{\'U}
8975  \gdef^^db{\^U}
8976  \gdef^^dc{\"U}
8977  \gdef^^dd{\'Y}
8978  \gdef^^de{\TH}
8979  \gdef^^df{\ss}
8980  %
8981  \gdef^^e0{\`a}
8982  \gdef^^e1{\'a}
8983  \gdef^^e2{\^a}
8984  \gdef^^e3{\~a}
8985  \gdef^^e4{\"a}
8986  \gdef^^e5{\ringaccent a}
8987  \gdef^^e6{\ae}
8988  \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c}
8989  \gdef^^e8{\`e}
8990  \gdef^^e9{\'e}
8991  \gdef^^ea{\^e}
8992  \gdef^^eb{\"e}
8993  \gdef^^ec{\`{\dotless i}}
8994  \gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless i}}
8995  \gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless i}}
8996  \gdef^^ef{\"{\dotless i}}
8997  %
8998  \gdef^^f0{\dh}
8999  \gdef^^f1{\~n}
9000  \gdef^^f2{\`o}
9001  \gdef^^f3{\'o}
9002  \gdef^^f4{\^o}
9003  \gdef^^f5{\~o}
9004  \gdef^^f6{\"o}
9005  \gdef^^f7{$\div$}
9006  \gdef^^f8{\o}
9007  \gdef^^f9{\`u}
9008  \gdef^^fa{\'u}
9009  \gdef^^fb{\^u}
9010  \gdef^^fc{\"u}
9011  \gdef^^fd{\'y}
9012  \gdef^^fe{\th}
9013  \gdef^^ff{\"y}
9014}
9015
9016% Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions.
9017\def\latninechardefs{%
9018  % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1.
9019  \latonechardefs
9020  %
9021  \gdef^^a4{\euro}
9022  \gdef^^a6{\v S}
9023  \gdef^^a8{\v s}
9024  \gdef^^b4{\v Z}
9025  \gdef^^b8{\v z}
9026  \gdef^^bc{\OE}
9027  \gdef^^bd{\oe}
9028  \gdef^^be{\"Y}
9029}
9030
9031% Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions.
9032\def\lattwochardefs{%
9033  \gdef^^a0{\tie}
9034  \gdef^^a1{\ogonek{A}}
9035  \gdef^^a2{\u{}}
9036  \gdef^^a3{\L}
9037  \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}}
9038  \gdef^^a5{\v L}
9039  \gdef^^a6{\'S}
9040  \gdef^^a7{\S}
9041  \gdef^^a8{\"{}}
9042  \gdef^^a9{\v S}
9043  \gdef^^aa{\cedilla S}
9044  \gdef^^ab{\v T}
9045  \gdef^^ac{\'Z}
9046  \gdef^^ad{\-}
9047  \gdef^^ae{\v Z}
9048  \gdef^^af{\dotaccent Z}
9049  %
9050  \gdef^^b0{\textdegree}
9051  \gdef^^b1{\ogonek{a}}
9052  \gdef^^b2{\ogonek{ }}
9053  \gdef^^b3{\l}
9054  \gdef^^b4{\'{}}
9055  \gdef^^b5{\v l}
9056  \gdef^^b6{\'s}
9057  \gdef^^b7{\v{}}
9058  \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ }
9059  \gdef^^b9{\v s}
9060  \gdef^^ba{\cedilla s}
9061  \gdef^^bb{\v t}
9062  \gdef^^bc{\'z}
9063  \gdef^^bd{\H{}}
9064  \gdef^^be{\v z}
9065  \gdef^^bf{\dotaccent z}
9066  %
9067  \gdef^^c0{\'R}
9068  \gdef^^c1{\'A}
9069  \gdef^^c2{\^A}
9070  \gdef^^c3{\u A}
9071  \gdef^^c4{\"A}
9072  \gdef^^c5{\'L}
9073  \gdef^^c6{\'C}
9074  \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C}
9075  \gdef^^c8{\v C}
9076  \gdef^^c9{\'E}
9077  \gdef^^ca{\ogonek{E}}
9078  \gdef^^cb{\"E}
9079  \gdef^^cc{\v E}
9080  \gdef^^cd{\'I}
9081  \gdef^^ce{\^I}
9082  \gdef^^cf{\v D}
9083  %
9084  \gdef^^d0{\DH}
9085  \gdef^^d1{\'N}
9086  \gdef^^d2{\v N}
9087  \gdef^^d3{\'O}
9088  \gdef^^d4{\^O}
9089  \gdef^^d5{\H O}
9090  \gdef^^d6{\"O}
9091  \gdef^^d7{$\times$}
9092  \gdef^^d8{\v R}
9093  \gdef^^d9{\ringaccent U}
9094  \gdef^^da{\'U}
9095  \gdef^^db{\H U}
9096  \gdef^^dc{\"U}
9097  \gdef^^dd{\'Y}
9098  \gdef^^de{\cedilla T}
9099  \gdef^^df{\ss}
9100  %
9101  \gdef^^e0{\'r}
9102  \gdef^^e1{\'a}
9103  \gdef^^e2{\^a}
9104  \gdef^^e3{\u a}
9105  \gdef^^e4{\"a}
9106  \gdef^^e5{\'l}
9107  \gdef^^e6{\'c}
9108  \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c}
9109  \gdef^^e8{\v c}
9110  \gdef^^e9{\'e}
9111  \gdef^^ea{\ogonek{e}}
9112  \gdef^^eb{\"e}
9113  \gdef^^ec{\v e}
9114  \gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless{i}}}
9115  \gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless{i}}}
9116  \gdef^^ef{\v d}
9117  %
9118  \gdef^^f0{\dh}
9119  \gdef^^f1{\'n}
9120  \gdef^^f2{\v n}
9121  \gdef^^f3{\'o}
9122  \gdef^^f4{\^o}
9123  \gdef^^f5{\H o}
9124  \gdef^^f6{\"o}
9125  \gdef^^f7{$\div$}
9126  \gdef^^f8{\v r}
9127  \gdef^^f9{\ringaccent u}
9128  \gdef^^fa{\'u}
9129  \gdef^^fb{\H u}
9130  \gdef^^fc{\"u}
9131  \gdef^^fd{\'y}
9132  \gdef^^fe{\cedilla t}
9133  \gdef^^ff{\dotaccent{}}
9134}
9135
9136% UTF-8 character definitions.
9137%
9138% This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some
9139% changes for Texinfo conventions.  It is included here under the GPL by
9140% permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team.
9141%
9142\newcount\countUTFx
9143\newcount\countUTFy
9144\newcount\countUTFz
9145
9146\gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter
9147   \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname}
9148%
9149\gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter
9150   \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname}
9151%
9152\gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter
9153   \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname}
9154
9155\gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{%
9156  \ifx #1\relax
9157    \message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}%
9158  \else
9159    \expandafter #1%
9160  \fi
9161}
9162
9163\begingroup
9164  \catcode`\~13
9165  \catcode`\"12
9166
9167  \def\UTFviiiLoop{%
9168    \global\catcode\countUTFx\active
9169    \uccode`\~\countUTFx
9170    \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}%
9171    \advance\countUTFx by 1
9172    \ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy
9173      \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop
9174    \fi}
9175
9176  \countUTFx = "C2
9177  \countUTFy = "E0
9178  \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
9179    \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiTwoOctets\string~}}
9180  \UTFviiiLoop
9181
9182  \countUTFx = "E0
9183  \countUTFy = "F0
9184  \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
9185    \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiThreeOctets\string~}}
9186  \UTFviiiLoop
9187
9188  \countUTFx = "F0
9189  \countUTFy = "F4
9190  \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
9191    \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiFourOctets\string~}}
9192  \UTFviiiLoop
9193\endgroup
9194
9195\begingroup
9196  \catcode`\"=12
9197  \catcode`\<=12
9198  \catcode`\.=12
9199  \catcode`\,=12
9200  \catcode`\;=12
9201  \catcode`\!=12
9202  \catcode`\~=13
9203
9204  \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacter#1#2{%
9205    \countUTFz = "#1\relax
9206    %\wlog{\space\space defining Unicode char U+#1 (decimal \the\countUTFz)}%
9207    \begingroup
9208      \parseXMLCharref
9209      \def\UTFviiiTwoOctets##1##2{%
9210        \csname u8:##1\string ##2\endcsname}%
9211      \def\UTFviiiThreeOctets##1##2##3{%
9212        \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\endcsname}%
9213      \def\UTFviiiFourOctets##1##2##3##4{%
9214        \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\string ##4\endcsname}%
9215      \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
9216       \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
9217       \gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2}%
9218    \endgroup}
9219
9220  \gdef\parseXMLCharref{%
9221    \ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax
9222      \errhelp = \EMsimple
9223      \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}%
9224    \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax
9225      \parseUTFviiiA,%
9226      \parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctets.,%
9227    \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax
9228      \parseUTFviiiA;%
9229      \parseUTFviiiA,%
9230      \parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctets.{,;}%
9231    \else
9232      \parseUTFviiiA;%
9233      \parseUTFviiiA,%
9234      \parseUTFviiiA!%
9235      \parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctets.{!,;}%
9236    \fi\fi\fi
9237  }
9238
9239  \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{%
9240    \countUTFx = \countUTFz
9241    \divide\countUTFz by 64
9242    \countUTFy = \countUTFz
9243    \multiply\countUTFz by 64
9244    \advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz
9245    \advance\countUTFx by 128
9246    \uccode `#1\countUTFx
9247    \countUTFz = \countUTFy}
9248
9249  \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{%
9250    \advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax
9251    \uccode `#3\countUTFz
9252    \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}}
9253\endgroup
9254
9255\def\utfeightchardefs{%
9256  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie}
9257  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown}
9258  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds}
9259  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }}
9260  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright}
9261  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf}
9262  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft}
9263  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-}
9264  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol}
9265  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }}
9266
9267  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }}
9268  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }}
9269  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }}
9270  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm}
9271  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright}
9272  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown}
9273
9274  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A}
9275  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A}
9276  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A}
9277  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A}
9278  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A}
9279  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA}
9280  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE}
9281  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}}
9282  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E}
9283  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E}
9284  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E}
9285  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E}
9286  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I}
9287  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I}
9288  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I}
9289  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I}
9290
9291  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D0}{\DH}
9292  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N}
9293  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O}
9294  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O}
9295  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O}
9296  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O}
9297  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O}
9298  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O}
9299  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U}
9300  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U}
9301  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U}
9302  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U}
9303  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y}
9304  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DE}{\TH}
9305  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss}
9306
9307  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a}
9308  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a}
9309  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a}
9310  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a}
9311  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a}
9312  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa}
9313  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae}
9314  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}}
9315  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e}
9316  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e}
9317  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e}
9318  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e}
9319  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}}
9320  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}}
9321  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}}
9322  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}}
9323
9324  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F0}{\dh}
9325  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n}
9326  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o}
9327  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o}
9328  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o}
9329  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o}
9330  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o}
9331  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o}
9332  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u}
9333  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u}
9334  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u}
9335  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u}
9336  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y}
9337  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FE}{\th}
9338  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y}
9339
9340  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A}
9341  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a}
9342  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}}
9343  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}}
9344  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0104}{\ogonek{A}}
9345  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0105}{\ogonek{a}}
9346  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C}
9347  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c}
9348  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C}
9349  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c}
9350  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\ogonek{E}}
9351  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\ogonek{e}}
9352  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}}
9353  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}}
9354  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}}
9355  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}}
9356  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}}
9357
9358  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E}
9359  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e}
9360  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}}
9361  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}}
9362  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}}
9363  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}}
9364  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}}
9365  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}}
9366  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G}
9367  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g}
9368  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}}
9369  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}}
9370
9371  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}}
9372  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}}
9373  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H}
9374  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h}
9375  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I}
9376  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}}
9377  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I}
9378  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}}
9379  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}}
9380  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}}
9381
9382  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}}
9383  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}}
9384  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ}
9385  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij}
9386  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J}
9387  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}}
9388  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L}
9389  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l}
9390
9391  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L}
9392  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l}
9393  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N}
9394  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n}
9395  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}}
9396  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}}
9397  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O}
9398  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o}
9399  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}}
9400  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}}
9401
9402  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}}
9403  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}}
9404  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE}
9405  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe}
9406  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R}
9407  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r}
9408  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}}
9409  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}}
9410  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S}
9411  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s}
9412  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S}
9413  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s}
9414  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}}
9415  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}}
9416
9417  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}}
9418  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}}
9419  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{t}}
9420  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{T}}
9421  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}}
9422
9423  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U}
9424  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u}
9425  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U}
9426  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u}
9427  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}}
9428  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}}
9429  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}}
9430  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}}
9431
9432  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}}
9433  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}}
9434  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W}
9435  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w}
9436  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y}
9437  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y}
9438  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y}
9439  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z}
9440  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z}
9441  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}}
9442  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}}
9443  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}}
9444  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}}
9445
9446  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}}
9447  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}}
9448  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}}
9449  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ}
9450  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj}
9451  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj}
9452  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ}
9453  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj}
9454  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj}
9455  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}}
9456  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}}
9457  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}}
9458
9459  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}}
9460  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}}
9461  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}}
9462  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}}
9463  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}}
9464
9465  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}}
9466  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}}
9467  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}}
9468  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}}
9469  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}}
9470  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}}
9471
9472  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}}
9473  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ}
9474  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz}
9475  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz}
9476  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G}
9477  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g}
9478  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N}
9479  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n}
9480  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}}
9481  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}}
9482  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}}
9483  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}}
9484
9485  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}}
9486  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}}
9487
9488  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}}
9489  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}}
9490  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}}
9491  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}}
9492  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}}
9493  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}}
9494
9495  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y}
9496  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y}
9497  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}}
9498
9499  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DB}{\ogonek{ }}
9500
9501  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}}
9502  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}}
9503  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}}
9504  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}}
9505  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}}
9506  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}}
9507  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}}
9508  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}}
9509  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}}
9510  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}}
9511  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}}
9512  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}}
9513
9514  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}}
9515  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}}
9516
9517  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G}
9518  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g}
9519  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}}
9520  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}}
9521  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}}
9522  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}}
9523  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H}
9524  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h}
9525
9526  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K}
9527  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k}
9528  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}}
9529  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}}
9530  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}}
9531  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}}
9532  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}}
9533  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}}
9534  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}}
9535  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}}
9536  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M}
9537  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m}
9538
9539  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}}
9540  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}}
9541  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}}
9542  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}}
9543  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}}
9544  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}}
9545  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}}
9546  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}}
9547  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}}
9548  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}}
9549
9550  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P}
9551  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p}
9552  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}}
9553  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}}
9554  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}}
9555  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}}
9556  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}}
9557  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}}
9558  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}}
9559  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}}
9560
9561  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}}
9562  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}}
9563  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}}
9564  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}}
9565  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}}
9566  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}}
9567  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}}
9568  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}}
9569  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}}
9570  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}}
9571
9572  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V}
9573  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v}
9574  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}}
9575  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}}
9576
9577  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W}
9578  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w}
9579  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W}
9580  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w}
9581  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W}
9582  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w}
9583  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}}
9584  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}}
9585  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}}
9586  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}}
9587  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}}
9588  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}}
9589  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X}
9590  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x}
9591  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}}
9592  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}}
9593
9594  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z}
9595  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z}
9596  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}}
9597  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}}
9598  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}}
9599  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}}
9600  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}}
9601  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t}
9602  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}}
9603  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}}
9604
9605  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}}
9606  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}}
9607
9608  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}}
9609  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}}
9610  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E}
9611  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e}
9612
9613  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}}
9614  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}}
9615  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}}
9616  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}}
9617
9618  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}}
9619  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}}
9620
9621  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y}
9622  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y}
9623  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}}
9624
9625  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y}
9626  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y}
9627
9628  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--}
9629  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---}
9630  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft}
9631  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright}
9632  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase}
9633  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft}
9634  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright}
9635  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase}
9636  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet}
9637  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots}
9638  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft}
9639  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright}
9640  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro}
9641
9642  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion}
9643  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result}
9644
9645  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus}
9646  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\point}
9647  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv}
9648}% end of \utfeightchardefs
9649
9650
9651% US-ASCII character definitions.
9652\def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done
9653   \relax
9654}
9655
9656% Make non-ASCII characters printable again for compatibility with
9657% existing Texinfo documents that may use them, even without declaring a
9658% document encoding.
9659%
9660\setnonasciicharscatcode \other
9661
9662
9663\message{formatting,}
9664
9665\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
9666
9667\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
9668\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
9669\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
9670
9671% Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
9672\vbadness = 10000
9673
9674% Don't be very finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
9675\hbadness = 6666
9676
9677% Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans.
9678\widowpenalty=10000
9679\clubpenalty=10000
9680
9681% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
9682% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.  We want the amount of
9683% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
9684% \hsize.  We call this whenever the paper size is set.
9685%
9686\def\setemergencystretch{%
9687  \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
9688    % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
9689    \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
9690  \else
9691    \emergencystretch = .15\hsize
9692  \fi
9693}
9694
9695% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth;
9696% 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip;
9697% 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width.
9698%
9699% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define
9700% \textleading.  The caller should also set \parskip.
9701%
9702\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{%
9703  \voffset = #3\relax
9704  \topskip = #6\relax
9705  \splittopskip = \topskip
9706  %
9707  \vsize = #1\relax
9708  \advance\vsize by \topskip
9709  \outervsize = \vsize
9710  \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin
9711  \pageheight = \vsize
9712  %
9713  \hsize = #2\relax
9714  \outerhsize = \hsize
9715  \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
9716  \pagewidth = \hsize
9717  %
9718  \normaloffset = #4\relax
9719  \bindingoffset = #5\relax
9720  %
9721  \ifpdf
9722    \pdfpageheight #7\relax
9723    \pdfpagewidth #8\relax
9724    % if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of
9725    % whatever layout pdftex was dumped with.
9726    \pdfhorigin = 1 true in
9727    \pdfvorigin = 1 true in
9728  \fi
9729  %
9730  \setleading{\textleading}
9731  %
9732  \parindent = \defaultparindent
9733  \setemergencystretch
9734}
9735
9736% @letterpaper (the default).
9737\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
9738  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
9739  \textleading = 13.2pt
9740  %
9741  % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
9742  \internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines
9743                    {\voffset}{.25in}%
9744                    {\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
9745                    {11in}{8.5in}%
9746}}
9747
9748% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size.
9749\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
9750  \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
9751  \textleading = 12pt
9752  %
9753  \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}%
9754                    {-.2in}{0in}%
9755                    {\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
9756                    {9.25in}{7in}%
9757  %
9758  \lispnarrowing = 0.3in
9759  \tolerance = 700
9760  \hfuzz = 1pt
9761  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
9762  \defbodyindent = .5cm
9763}}
9764
9765% Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size.
9766% (Just testing, parameters still in flux.)
9767\def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1
9768  \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt
9769  \textleading = 12pt
9770  %
9771  \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}%
9772                    {-.2in}{-.4in}%
9773                    {0pt}{14pt}%
9774                    {9in}{6in}%
9775  %
9776  \lispnarrowing = 0.25in
9777  \tolerance = 700
9778  \hfuzz = 1pt
9779  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
9780  \defbodyindent = .4cm
9781}}
9782
9783% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
9784\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
9785  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
9786  \textleading = 13.2pt
9787  %
9788  % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050
9789  % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm.
9790  % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust
9791  % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align.  Then
9792  % do the same for \bindingoffset.  You can set these for testing in
9793  % your texinfo source file like this:
9794  % @tex
9795  % \global\normaloffset = -6mm
9796  % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm
9797  % @end tex
9798  \internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines
9799                    {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
9800                    {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
9801                    {297mm}{210mm}%
9802  %
9803  \tolerance = 700
9804  \hfuzz = 1pt
9805  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
9806  \defbodyindent = 5mm
9807}}
9808
9809% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper.
9810% From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000.
9811% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small.
9812\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1
9813  \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt
9814  \textleading = 12.5pt
9815  %
9816  \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}%
9817                    {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
9818                    {\bindingoffset}{8pt}%
9819                    {210mm}{148mm}%
9820  %
9821  \lispnarrowing = 0.2in
9822  \tolerance = 800
9823  \hfuzz = 1.2pt
9824  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
9825  \defbodyindent = 2mm
9826  \tableindent = 12mm
9827}}
9828
9829% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.
9830\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
9831  \afourpaper
9832  \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}%
9833                    {\voffset}{4.6mm}%
9834                    {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
9835                    {297mm}{210mm}%
9836  %
9837  % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper.
9838  \globaldefs = 0
9839}}
9840
9841% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format.
9842\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1
9843  \afourpaper
9844  \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}%
9845                    {\voffset}{-2.95mm}%
9846                    {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
9847                    {297mm}{210mm}%
9848  \globaldefs = 0
9849}}
9850
9851% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
9852% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
9853% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
9854%
9855\parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
9856\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
9857  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
9858  \globaldefs = 1
9859  %
9860  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
9861  \setleading{\textleading}%
9862  %
9863  \dimen0 = #1\relax
9864  \advance\dimen0 by \voffset
9865  %
9866  \dimen2 = \hsize
9867  \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset
9868  %
9869  \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}%
9870                    {\voffset}{\normaloffset}%
9871                    {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
9872                    {\dimen0}{\dimen2}%
9873}}
9874
9875% Set default to letter.
9876%
9877\letterpaper
9878
9879
9880\message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
9881
9882\def^^L{\par} % remove \outer, so ^L can appear in an @comment
9883
9884% DEL is a comment character, in case @c does not suffice.
9885\catcode`\^^? = 14
9886
9887% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
9888\catcode`\"=\other \def\normaldoublequote{"}
9889\catcode`\$=\other \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
9890\catcode`\+=\other \def\normalplus{+}
9891\catcode`\<=\other \def\normalless{<}
9892\catcode`\>=\other \def\normalgreater{>}
9893\catcode`\^=\other \def\normalcaret{^}
9894\catcode`\_=\other \def\normalunderscore{_}
9895\catcode`\|=\other \def\normalverticalbar{|}
9896\catcode`\~=\other \def\normaltilde{~}
9897
9898% This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt
9899% (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts,
9900% where something hairier probably needs to be done.
9901%
9902% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
9903% otherwise.  Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
9904% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
9905% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
9906%
9907\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
9908
9909% Same as above, but check for italic font.  Actually this also catches
9910% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
9911% italic fonts.  But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
9912% this is not a problem.
9913\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
9914
9915% Turn off all special characters except @
9916% (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
9917% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
9918% use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
9919
9920\catcode`\"=\active
9921\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
9922\let"=\activedoublequote
9923\catcode`\~=\active
9924\def~{{\tt\char126}}
9925\chardef\hat=`\^
9926\catcode`\^=\active
9927\def^{{\tt \hat}}
9928
9929\catcode`\_=\active
9930\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
9931\let\realunder=_
9932% Subroutine for the previous macro.
9933\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }
9934
9935\catcode`\|=\active
9936\def|{{\tt\char124}}
9937\chardef \less=`\<
9938\catcode`\<=\active
9939\def<{{\tt \less}}
9940\chardef \gtr=`\>
9941\catcode`\>=\active
9942\def>{{\tt \gtr}}
9943\catcode`\+=\active
9944\def+{{\tt \char 43}}
9945\catcode`\$=\active
9946\def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
9947
9948% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
9949% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
9950% So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
9951% \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
9952\def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
9953
9954% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after
9955% parsing them.
9956\def\turnoffactive{%
9957  \normalturnoffactive
9958  \otherbackslash
9959}
9960
9961\catcode`\@=0
9962
9963% \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font,
9964% as in \char`\\.
9965\global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\
9966\global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont  % let existing .??s files work
9967
9968% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and
9969% \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines).
9970{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}}
9971
9972% In texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash
9973% in fixed width font.
9974\catcode`\\=\active  % @ for escape char from now on.
9975
9976% The story here is that in math mode, the \char of \backslashcurfont
9977% ends up printing the roman \ from the math symbol font (because \char
9978% in math mode uses the \mathcode, and plain.tex sets
9979% \mathcode`\\="026E).  It seems better for @backslashchar{} to always
9980% print a typewriter backslash, hence we use an explicit \mathchar,
9981% which is the decimal equivalent of "715c (class 7, e.g., use \fam;
9982% ignored family value; char position "5C).  We can't use " for the
9983% usual hex value because it has already been made active.
9984@def@normalbackslash{{@tt @ifmmode @mathchar29020 @else @backslashcurfont @fi}}
9985@let@backslashchar = @normalbackslash % @backslashchar{} is for user documents.
9986
9987% On startup, @fixbackslash assigns:
9988%  @let \ = @normalbackslash
9989% \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont.
9990% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with
9991% catcode other.  We switch back and forth between these.
9992@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont}
9993@gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash}
9994
9995% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of
9996% the literal character `\'.  Also revert - to its normal character, in
9997% case the active - from code has slipped in.
9998%
9999{@catcode`- = @active
10000 @gdef@normalturnoffactive{%
10001   @let-=@normaldash
10002   @let"=@normaldoublequote
10003   @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix
10004   @let+=@normalplus
10005   @let<=@normalless
10006   @let>=@normalgreater
10007   @let\=@normalbackslash
10008   @let^=@normalcaret
10009   @let_=@normalunderscore
10010   @let|=@normalverticalbar
10011   @let~=@normaltilde
10012   @markupsetuplqdefault
10013   @markupsetuprqdefault
10014   @unsepspaces
10015 }
10016}
10017
10018% Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
10019% This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
10020@otherifyactive
10021
10022% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
10023% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
10024% a backslash.
10025%
10026@gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
10027@global@let\ = @eatinput
10028
10029% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
10030% the first `\' in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
10031% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
10032% Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input
10033% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
10034%
10035@gdef@fixbackslash{%
10036  @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
10037  @catcode`+=@active
10038  @catcode`@_=@active
10039}
10040
10041% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
10042@escapechar = `@@
10043
10044% These (along with & and #) are made active for url-breaking, so need
10045% active definitions as the normal characters.
10046@def@normaldot{.}
10047@def@normalquest{?}
10048@def@normalslash{/}
10049
10050% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
10051% @hashchar{} gets its own user-level command, because of #line.
10052@catcode`@& = @other @def@normalamp{&}
10053@catcode`@# = @other @def@normalhash{#}
10054@catcode`@% = @other @def@normalpercent{%}
10055
10056@let @hashchar = @normalhash
10057
10058@c Finally, make ` and ' active, so that txicodequoteundirected and
10059@c txicodequotebacktick work right in, e.g., @w{@code{`foo'}}.  If we
10060@c don't make ` and ' active, @code will not get them as active chars.
10061@c Do this last of all since we use ` in the previous @catcode assignments.
10062@catcode`@'=@active
10063@catcode`@`=@active
10064@markupsetuplqdefault
10065@markupsetuprqdefault
10066
10067@c Local variables:
10068@c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
10069@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
10070@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
10071@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
10072@c time-stamp-end: "}"
10073@c End:
10074
10075@c vim:sw=2:
10076
10077@ignore
10078   arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115
10079@end ignore
10080